IH 1660 Prior

Thank you for purchasing this manual from Farm Manuals Fast.
Your contribution
will help us continue to collect and expand our manual database.
Tips for getting the most out of this manual
Keep this manual in a safe place!
Digital files seem to have a habit of getting lost exactly when you need them most. To ensure
that you don’t accidentally delete or misplace this file here are some tips you should follow:
• Immediately after downloading your manual (i.e. now) it’s a good idea to save this file in
a place you will remember. We recommend putting it in a folder. To make a new folder
in Windows just right click -> New -> Folder. Name the folder something like Digital
Manuals, Tractor Manual, etc.
• Once you have a folder for this file, go to File -> Save As… Now save the manual file to
the folder you created. If you want, rename the file to something you will remember.
We recommend including the model number (this is important in case you forget where
you saved this file on your computer).
Remember: If you have put this file in a safe place on your computer and are unable to find
it again the following year, try Windows search feature: Start ->Search. Type in the model
number or another keyword that you know is in the file name.
Quick Search
If you are looking for something specific in this manual, you are in luck; All our manuals
are searchable! Just press CTR + F and type in what you are looking for. Some things to
remember when using the quick search feature:
• Your search won’t be 100 percent accurate. The software we use to make the
text readable might confuse an “I” with an “l” (L and I ) or a smudge on the paper
might have made the text unreadable by the software.
• Quick search will only search the exact words you type into the search bar in the
exact order you put them in. For example if you type in 20 millimeters when in
the manual it was written 20 mm your search will not work.
What you should get from this tip is that: Quick Search is not completely reliable. Be sure to
check the index and table of contents if you are getting no results when using the quick
search feature.
Printing
You will likely want to print out some or all of the pages from this manual to use in the
workshop.
Even if you want to print the whole manual you will probably not want to print out these first
couple of pages.
All of the printing options are located at File -> Print or CTRL + P. The most important options
are in the page range box. If you printed this manual now it’s likely that your printer would
automatically print every page. If you want to omit some pages or only print certain page
numbers you should to click the Pages button rather than All in the page range box. Now enter
the page numbers you wish to print, for example 2-40 or 18-22.
If you are planning to print only a certain section of pages be sure to use the page numbers
that are shown on the toolbar and not the page number shown on the actual page.
If you are planning to print this entire manual it is recommended that you print on both
sides of the paper. It looks nicer and you use half as much paper. Some printers have
duplex printing where the printer can automatically print on both sides. If your printer
doesn’t have duplexing capabilities it will take more work. First you need to print off the
odd pages. To do this select odd pages only in the print setup. Before you start to print, we
recommend you label the different sides of the first sheet in your paper tray because
depending on your printer it may be hard to figure out which way to correctly put the paper.
Once you have printed out the odd pages just flip the stack of papers around according to
the markings you made earlier and print the even side. Then put it in a binder, folder etc
These Tips might be outdated. Check www.FarmManualsFast.com/ Tips-and-Tricks
If you enjoyed the quality of this manual and have some manuals of your
own you would like digitized please visit our website at
http://farmmanualsfast.com/We-Need-Manuals.html
TOTHEOWNER _____________________________________
TO THE OWNER OF A CASE IH COMBINE

Read this manual before you start the engine or operate the machine. If you need
more information, see your Case dealer.
Your dealer can give you assistance with I Case Company approved service parts.
Your dealer has technicians with special training that know the best methods of repair
and maintenance for your machine.
Call your dealer if you need any assistance or information.
NOTE: When you are in the combine seat looking forward, the right hand and left hand
of the combine are the same as your right hand and left hand.
9-11422
2 IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION AND

SERIAL NUMBERS
Write your machine Model number, Product Identification Number (P.I.N.), and Serial
Numbers of major components on the lines provided. If needed, give these numbers
to your dealer when you need parts or information for your machine.
MODELJPIN NUMBERS ENGINE
Model Number _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Serial Number _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Pin Number _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
9-11422
GENERAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 3
Safety/Decals .......................................................................................................... .
Specifications ......................................................................................................... 1
Instruments/Controls .............................................................................................. 30
Operating Instructions ........................................................................................... .
Field Operation ..................................................................................................... 1
Tires/Wheels!Tracks/SpacinglBaliast ................................................................... 1
Lubrication/Filters/Fluids ...................................................................................... 21
Maintenance/Adjustments .................................................................................... 261
Electrical System .................................................................................................. 34
Storage ................................................................................................................. 361

3
9-11422
4
9-11422
SAFETY/DECALS ____________________________________ 5
SECTION INDEX
Decals .............................................9-17
Feeder Safety Lock .............................. 8
Safety .................................................... 6
Safety Rules ...................................... 6.7
9-11422
6 SAFETY/DECALS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
SAFETY
Understand that your safety and the safety of other persons is measured by how you
service, and operate this machine. Know the positions and operations of all controls
before you try to operate them. MAKE SURE YOU CHECK ALL CONTROLS IN A SAFE
AREA BEFORE STARTING YOUR WORK.
READ THIS MANUAL COMPLETELY and make sure you understand the controls. All
equipment has a limit. Make sure you understand the speed, brakes, steering,
stability, and load characteristics of this machine before you start to operate it.
The safety information given in this manual does not replace safety codes, insurance
needs, federal, state and local laws. Make sure your machine has the correct
equipment needed as designated by the local laws and regulations.
The J I Case Company is continuing to work for your safety by making combines with
better protection and by giving these rules for safe operation.
A Safety Rules A
Operate controls only when seated in the operators seat. R137
A frequent cause of personal injury or death is persons falling off and being run over.
Do not permit others to ride. Only one person - the operator - should be on the
machine when it is in operation. RllSA
Engine can start with transmission in gear when neutral or safety start switch is
by-passed:
1. Do not connect across terminals on starter.
2. Attach a booster battery by connecting the positive terminal of the booster battery
to the "positive terminal" provided or to the positive terminal of the machine battery.
Connect the negative terminal of the booster battery to the "negative terminal"
provided or to the chassis of the machine.
Then use recommended starting procedures from the operators seat.
3. When necessary, repair electrical system components promptly so that "jump
starting" will not be attempted.
Machine run-away can cause injury or death to operator and bystanders.
Rl07C
9-11422
SAFETY/DECALS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 7
Travel speed should be such that complete control and machine stability is main-
tained at all times. Where possible, avoid operating near ditches, embankments and
holes. Reduce speed when turning, crossing slopes, and on rough, slick, or muddy
surfaces. R109A
Collision of high speed road traffic and slow moving machines can cause personal
injury or death. On roads, use flasher/lights according to local laws. Keep SMV
emblem visible. Pull over to let faster traffic pass. Slow down and signal before turning
off. R110D
Brake pedals must be locked together for road travel. This will insure uniform brake
application and maximum stopping ability. R112
Never operate the engine in a closed building. Proper ventilation is required under all
circumstances. R142
Never refuel the machine when the engine is hot or running. Never smoke while re-
fueling.
R139B
Check and service cooling system according to maintenance instructions.

Hot coolant can spray out if radiator cap is removed while system is hot. To remove
radiator cap, let system cool, turn to first notch, then wait until all pressure is released.
Scalding can result from fast removal of radiator cap. R141A
Hydraulic oil or diesel fuel leaking under pressure can penetrate the skin and cause
infection or other injury.
To Prevent Personal Injury:
Relieve all pressure, before disconnecting fluid lines.
Before applying pressure, make sure all connections are tight and components are in
good condition.
Never use your hand to check for suspected leaks under pressure.
Use a piece of cardboard or wood for this purpose.
If injured by leaking fluid, see your doctor immediately. R149A
Battery explosion and/or damage to electrical components can result from improper
connection of booster batteries or charger. Connect positive to positive and negative
to negative. Externally, battery acid can cause burns and blindness, and taken inter-
nally is poison. R146
It is good practice to carry a fire extinguisher on the machine. Be sure that the
extinguisher is properly maintained and be familiar with its proper use.
R102A
9-11422
8 SAF8Y/DECA~ ___________________________________
Feeder Safety Lock

The feeder LH lift cylinder is equipped with a safety lock. The safety lock is used to
prevent accidental lowering of the feeder or header. ALWAYS engage the feeder
safety lock before working under the feeder or header.
TO ENGAGE THE FEEDER SAFElY LOCK:

1. Raise the feeder to the maximum height.
2. Remove the lock pin from the feeder lock.
3. Pull the latch pin out to release the feeder lock. Lower the feeder lock over the LH lift
cylinder rod.
4. Install the lock pin and hairpin cotter to hold the feeder lock in place.
TO DISENGAGE THE FEEDER SAFElY LOCK:

1. Remove the lock pin and hairpin cotter.
2. Rotate the feeder lock up and the latch pin will engage.
3. Install the lock pin and hairpin cotter in the end of the feeder lock for storage.
IJ.. Always place feeder lock in position on lift cylinder before working
.. under header or feeder M184
9-11422
SAFETY/DECALS _____________________________________ 9
DECALS
IMPORTANT: Install new decals if the old decals are destroyed, lost, painted over or
can not be read. When parts are replaced that have decals, make sure you install a new
decal with each new part.
NOTE: New decals are available from your Dealer or write to:
Case Company
Customer Relations Department
700 State St
Racine, Wisconsin 53404
A DANGER
Do not open until engine and
all mechanism have stopped.
179749C
9-11422
10 SAF8Y/DECALS ___________________________________
A DANGER
Do not open until engine and
all mechanism have stopped.
179749C
10
9-11422
SAFEN/DECALS ____________________________________ 11
A OANGER
KIIp . . . . uf ......
when engine is running.
132nsoc
A DANGER
Always place feeder lock in position on
lift cylinder before working under header
or feeder.
~
IDCKPI••DLE ~-
__ IDCK~.
0' o~
AILE AILE
mIlAGE PIISITID. FEEDER LOCK JIDSIlID.
189922C
11
9-11422
12
SAFCN/DECALS ____________________________________
A DANGER
Do not enter grain tank when

engine is running.
1319494C
12
9-11422
__
SAFETY/DECALS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 13
A CAUTION
Shut off engine before
adjusting concave.
185035C
~ CAUTION
185442C
A CAUTION
Shut off engine HI (PUSH)
before shifting ::~)

rotor drive LO (PULL)
13
9-11422
14 SAFEN/DECALS ____________________________________
A CAUTION
[)isengage separator clutch and
shut off engine before removing
shield.
188199C
A CAUTION
Disengage separdtol clutch dnd shut off engine
belore
U::;lnq 10101 roci(lllg bar wrench
Making Dell adjustments
Shdtlng rotor geatcase lever
4 Checlung rOl0r geJrCJSC ad lev!"!
S lubricating
Changing fuel fdters
Performing other servIcing and adjustments
188198C
A WARNING
132nS1C1
14
9-11422
SAF8Y/DECALS ____________________________________ 15
A CAUTION
A CAUTION
Keep out of engine compartment
while engine is running.
188200C
15
9-11422
16 SAFETY/DECALS _____________________________________
ACAUTION
Keep off while machine
is in motion.
2754442R
16
9-11422
SAFCN/DECALS ____________________________________ 17
Planetary Gear Power Guide Wheels Only
A CAUTION
Do not engage four wheel
drive UNLESS planetary
gears are coupled to wheel
motors. (see Operator's
Manual)
1310710C1
A CAUTION
FOR SAFE OPERATIONS:
t. PI.ce .11 I. .,. ia a.lllni or off ,osition IIlfo..

Ibmng r.,ial.
2. Sililids ... for yoar protlctioa. K••p til... in ,1.cI.
3. KII, lI.adl. f••t ••,d clatlling awey fro .. po•• r
dri..a ,.rtl.
4. M.... crrt.ia ... ryDal il cl•• r of ... cllin.ry
hflr. It.rti., .alial Dr Dp.r..tiDn.
5. alfore dil...untin•• di..a.... clutellil. 11.lr .n
lIydnalieelly ClatrDlled UDits. IDcllllr.tll ,ad ItDP
••• inl. Wait fDr ,II "'''''Iat to ItOP lI.fo ..
Ilrvicia. _cbin.ry aal.11 othrwil' Ip.cifieelly
nco••• aded in the Oplr,tor·1 M,aall.
I. NO RIDERS! Alia til' "ryea, IWly fro ..
• Icllial layti.1 lali.1 il ..nnial.
7. Ridaci SPied wII.a tarail, Dr .pplyiag i.diwida.1
bnt'l.
I. RI"aa s,lId by ali •• the lIydrlsbtic co.trll
I••• r. 01 alt all til. lin .... to _rridl till
IIprollltic trlns.inioa.
I. Nanr .ttI.pt to sllift , ..,. Ir d.,r... til.
f.at-.-i.cll pa",1 a. lIills.
to. CII,II IInh ' ....Is tl,atII.r for lIi,1I , ..r or
r... _ I ••d _ fIaIIi. . . .raia, li,_ at .11
data .. ,alllic n.ds a.ll. prollibited lIy law.
11. Do aot ..caed 20 MPH.
t2. lII.n to 1,lr.b tllis •• clli.. llfoly.
Rlld till O,lr.tor·s M••a.1.
2753929R
17
9-11422
18
18
9-11422
SPECIFICATIONS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 19
SECTION INDEX
Engine ................................................ 20 Overall Measurements ................. 28, 29
Air Intake System ............................ 20
Cooling System .............................. 20 Power Train ........................................ 21
Fuel System .................................... 20 Brakes ............................................. 21
Lubricating System ......................... 20 Hydraulic System ............................ 21
Hydrostatic Propulsion System ...... 21
General Machine ........................... 22-24 Transmission .................................. 21
Auger Bed ....................................... 22
Chaffer Sieve .................................. 23 Shipping Weight ................................. 29
Cleaning Area ................................. 23
Cleaning Fan .................................. 23 Travel Speeds ...............................25-27
Concave .......................................... 22 Grain/Corn Combine
Discharge Beater ............................ 22 STD. Transmission ...................... 25
Elevators .......................................,.23 Optional Transmission ................ 26
Feeder............................................. 22 Rice Combine ................................. 27
Grain Delivery Auger ...................... 23
Grain Tank ...................................... 24
Grain Tank Levering Auger ............ 23
Grain Tank Unloader ...................... 24
Rotor ............................................... 22
Rotor Cage ..................................... 22
Shoe Sieve ...................................... 23
Straw Chopper ................................ 24
Straw Spreader ............................... 24
Tailings Auger Trough .................... 23
Tailings Delivery Auger ................... 23
Tracks ............................................. 24
19
9-11422
20
SPECIFICATIONS,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
DIESEL ENGINE
Model ............................................................................................................ DT-466B
Type ......................................................................... Six Cylinder, Four Stroke Cycle,
Turbocharged, Valve in Cylinder Head
Firing Order .............................................................................................. 1-5-3-6-2-4
Bore ....................................................................................... 4.301 inch (109.2 mm)
Stroke .................................................................................... 5.350 inch (135.9 mm)
Piston Displacement .................................................... .466 Cubic inch (7 636 cm 3)
Compression Ratio ...................................................................................... 16.3 to 1
Cylinder Sleeves ........................................................... Wet Type, Can be Removed
Governor Engine Speed Without Load ........................................ 2690 to 2770 RPM
Rated Engine Speed ..................................................................................2500 RPM
Engine Idle Speed .......................................................................... 950 to 1050 RPM
Rocker Arm-to-Valve Clearance (Exhaust) ........................... 0.025 inch (0.635 mm)
(Intake) ............................... 0.025 inch (0.635 mm )
IMPORTANT: Rocker Arm-to-Valve Clearance adjustments must be made when the

engine is not running.
Engine Lubrication System

Oil Pressure ................................................................ 42 to 65 PSI (290 to 448 kPa)
with Engine Warm and
Operating at Rated Speed.
Type System ............................................................................... Pressure and Spray
Fuel System
Fuel Injection Pump ....................................................... United Technologies Diesel
Systems, Model 100
Pump Timing ................................................. 15 Degrees (BTC) Before Top Center.
Fuel Injectors ........................................................................................ Robert Bosch
Air Intake System

Type ....................................................... Dry Type Air Induction System, Two Stage.
Cooling System
Type ........................................................... Pressure System, Thermostat Controlled
Bypass, Impeller Type Pump.
Radiator .................................................................... Heavy Duty Fin and Tube Type
Thermostat ......................................... Start to Open at Approximately 180°F (82°C)
Fully Open at 202°F (94°C).
Pressure Cap ...................................................................................... 9 PSI (62 kPa)
20
9-11422
SPECIFICATIONS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 21
POWER TRAIN
Transmission
Type .............................................................. Three Speed Range, Hydrostatic Drive
Gear Selection ........................................................................................Three Speed
Hydrostatic Propulsion System

Pump Type ......................................................... Variable Displacement Axial Piston
Pump with Manual Displacement Control.
Pump Capacity at 2500 Engine RPM .................... 53 to 58 GPM (201 to 220 I/min)
Maximum System Pressure ................................................... 5500 PSI (37 923 kPa)
Auxiliary Hydraulic System

Pump Type ............................................................................................... Gear Pump
Pump Capacity at 2700 Engine RPM ................... 12.0 GPM (45.42 I/min Minimum)
Maximum System Pressure ................................................... 2250 PSI (15514 kPa)
Foot Brakes
Hydraulic Operated, Triple Disc ...................................................... 8 inch (203 mm)
Fluid Type ................................................................................... SAE J1703 (DOT 3)
Reservoir Capacity ...............................................................................6 oz (177 mL)
21
9-11422
22 SPECIRCATIONS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
GENERAL MACHINE
Feeder
Type ............................................................................. Under Shot Slatted Conveyor
Width .......................................................................................... 36.5 inch (927 mm)
Length - with 23.1-26 and 28L-26 R1, R3 Tires ....................... 47 inch (1 194 mm)
- with Other Size Drive Tires ...................................... 54.5 inch (1 384 mm)
Pivot Shaft Speed ........................................................................................398 RPM
Conveyor Chain Speed ............................................................ 497 fVmin (2.52 m/s)
Feeder Jackshaft Speed ..............................................................................500 RPM
Rotor Cage
Diameter ........................................................................................ 28 inch (711 mm)
Length ..................................................................................... 81.1 inch (2 059 mm)
Rotor Cage Separating Area ......................................................... 989 in2 (0.638 m2)
Rotor
Diameter ........................................................................................ 24 inch (610 mm)
Length ...................................................................................... 110 inch (2 794 mm)
Speeds - Two Speed Gear Case
Lo-Range ...................................................................................... 280 to 650 RPM
Hi-Range ..................................................................................... 530 to 1260 RPM
Rotor Grate Area ......................................................................... 1145 in2 (0.739 m2)
Total Separating Area (Separator
Cage and Rotor Grate) ........................................................... 2134 in2 (1.377 m2)
Concave
Type .................................................................................. 3 Sections - Bar and Wire
Wire Size - Grain Combine ......................................... 3/16 inch Dia at 0.42 inch
Spacing (4.8 at 10.7 mm)
- Corn and Rice Combines ........................... 1/4 inch Dia at 0.83 inch
Spacing (6.4 at 21.1 mm)
Concave Area .............................................................................. 1421 in2 (0.917 m2)
Concave Grate Area ................................................................... 1341 in2 (0.865 m2)
Total Threshing and Separating Area
{Total Rotor Cage Separating Area Concave Grate Area
and Rotor Grate Area) ............................................................... 3475 in2 (2.24 m2)
Discharge Beater
Type ...............................................................................................3 Blade Triangular
Speed ...........................................................................................................816 RPM
Auger Bed
Number of Augers .................................................................................................... 4
Speed ...........................................................................................................273 RPM
Direction of Rotation .................................................................................. Clockwise
22
9-11422
SPECIFICATIONS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 23
Cleaning Fan
Type ................................................................................................................ 6 Blade
Speed ............................................................................................. 450 to 1200 RPM
- With Slow Speed Drive (If Equipped) ................................. 156 to 453 RPM
Chaffer Sieve
Type ........................................................................................................... Adjustable
Spacing - Grain and Rice Combines ...................................... 1.12 inch (28.4 mm)
- Com Combine .......................................................... 1.62 inch (41.1 mm)
Shoe Sieve
Type ........................................................................................................... Adjustable
Spacing ..................................................................................... 1 .12 inch (28.4 mm)
Cleaning Area
Chaffer ......................................................................................... 2533 in2 (1.634 m2)
Shoe ............................................................................................ 2088 in2 (1.347 m2)
Pneumatic...................................................................................... 129 in2 (0.083 m2)
Total ............................................................................................. 4750 in2 (3.064 m2)
Elevators
Type ............................................................................ Roller Chain w/Rubber Flights
Speed - Tailings Drive Shaft .......................................................................487 RPM
- Tailings Conveyor Chain ........................................... 463 ft/min (2.35 m/s)
- Clean Grain Drive Shaft ............................................................... 411 RPM
- Clean Grain Conveyor Chain .................................... 503 ft/min (2.56 m/s)
Grain Delivery Auger

Diameter ..................................................................................... 8.78 inch (223 mm)
Speed ...........................................................................................................411 RPM
Grain Tank Leveling Auger - Corn and Grain Combine

Auger Type ................................................................................................ Adjustable
Diameter .......................................................................................... 5 inch (127 mm)
Tailings Auger Trough

Diameter .......................................................................................... 5 inch (127 mm)
Auger Speed ................................................................................................487 RPM
Tailings Delivery Auger

Diameter .......................................................................................... 5 inch (127 mm)
Speed ...........................................................................................................487 RPM
23
9-11422
24
SPECIFICATIONS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Grain Tank
Capacity ..................................................................................180 bushels (6.63 rn 3)
Grain Tank Unloader
Unloader Tube Auger Speed .......................................................................578 RPM
Unloading Time (Approximate) ............................................................... 95 seconds
Straw Spreader
Rotors .........................................................................................................Two 6 Bat
Speed ...........................................................................................................244 RPM
Straw Chopper - If Equipped

Rotor Diameter ........................................................................... 16.5 inch (419 mrn)
Number of Rotor Blades ........................................................................................ 28
Number of Concave Blades .................................................................................. 25
Speed of Rotor - High ..............................................................................2736 RPM
- Low ..................................................................................685 RPM
Tracks - If Equipped
Drive Tread ............................................................................... 112 inch (2 845 mm)
24
9-11422
SPECIFICATIONS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 25
APPROXIMATE TRAVEL SPEEDS

Grain/Corn Combine
Standard Transmission with 36/37 Change Gears
HYDROSTATIC SINGLE SPEED TWO SPEED
DRIVE MOTOR OR TWO SPEED
RANGE LO HI
GEAR 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd*
TIRE mph mph mph mph mph mph

SIZE (km/h) (km/h) (km/h) (km/h) (km/h) (km/h)
18.4-38 R1 4.24 7.71 20.26 5.12 9.33 20.26
(6.82) (12.41) (32.61) (8.25) (15.02) (32.61)
18.4-38 R2 4.25 7.74 20.33 5.14 9.36 20.33

(6.84) (12.46) (32.72) (8.27) (15.06) (32.72)
23.1-26 R1 3.71 6.75 17.74 4.49 8.17 17.74
(5.97) (10.87) (28.55) (7.22) (13.15) (28.55)
23.1-26 R3 3.44 6.27 16.48 4.17 7.59 16.48

(5.54) (10.09) (26.52) (6.70) (12.21) (26.52)
28L-26 R1 3.73 6.80 17.87 4.52 8.23 17.87

(6.01) (10.94) (28.75) (7.27) (13.24) (28.75)
28L-26 R2 3.76 6.85 17.99 4.55 8.29 17.99

(6.05) (11.02) (28.96) (7.32) (13.33) (28.96)
28L-26 R3 3.65 6.66 17.49 4.42 8.05 17.49

(5.88) (10.71) (28.14) (7.12) (12.96) (28.14)
24.5-32 R1 4.20 7.64 20.08 5.08 9.24 20.08

(6.75) (12.30) (32.31) (8.17) (14.88) (32.31)
24.5-32 R2 4.21 7.67 20.14 5.09 9.27 20.14

(6.77) (12.34) (32.41) (8.19) (14.93) (32.41)
24.5-32 R3 3.97 7.23 19.00 4.80 8.75 19.00

(6.39) (11.64) (30.58) (7.73) (14.08) (30.58)
30.5L-32 R1 4.24 7.71 20.26 5.12 9.33 20.26

(6.82) (12.41) (32.61) (8.25) (15.02) (32.61)
30.5L-32 R2 4.34 7.91 20.77 5.25 9.56 20.77

(6.99) (12.72) (33.43) (8.45) (15.39) (33.43)
30.5L-32 R3 4.02 7.33 19.25 4.87 8.87 19.25

(6.48) (11.79) (30.99) (7.87) (14.27) (30.99)
67 x 34-30 R2 4.06 7.40 19.44 4.92 8.95 19.44

(6.54) (11.91) (31.29) (7.91) (14.41) (31.29)
* An electrical lockout switch prevents the hydrostatic motor from shifting to HI range
when combine is operated in 3rd gear.
NOTE: The same speeds apply for forward and reverse.
25
9-11422
26
SPECIFICATIONS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Grain/Corn Combine
Optional Transmission with 32/41 Change Gears
RANGE LO HI
GEAR 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd
SIZE (kmJh) (kmJh) (km/h) (km/h) (km/h) (km/h)
23.1-26 R1 2.97 5.42 14.23 3.60 6.55 17.22

(4.79) (8.72) (22.90) (5.79) (10.55) (27.71)
23.1-26 R3 2.76 5.03 13.22 3.34 6.09 15.99

(4.45) (8.10) (21.27) (5.38) (9.80) (25.74)
28L-26 R1 3.00 5.46 14.33 3.62 6.60 17.34

(4.82) (8.78) (23.06) (5.83) (10.62) (27.91)
28L-26 R2 3.02 5.49 14.43 3.65 6.65 17.46

(4.85) (8.84) (23.23) (5.87) (10.70) (28.10)
28L-26 R3 2.93 5.34 14.03 3.55 6.46 16.97

(4.72) (8.59) (22.58) (5.71) (10.40) (27.32)
24.5-32 R1 3.37 6.13 16.10 4.07 7.42 19.49

(5.42) (9.86) (25.92) (6.55) (11.94) (31.36)
24.5-32 R2 3.38 6.15 16.15 4.08 7.44 19.55

(5.43) (9.90) (26.00) (6.57) (11.97) (31.46)
24.5-32 R3 3.19 5.80 15.24 3.85 7.02 18.44

(5.13) (9.34) (24.53) (6.20) (11.30) (29.68)
18.4-38 R2 3.41 6.21 16.31 4.12 7.51 19.73

(5.49) (9.99) (26.25) (6.63) (12.09) (31.75)
18.4-38 R1 3.40 6.19 16.26 4.11 7.49 19.67

30.5L-32 R1 (5.47) (9.96) (26.16) (6.62) (12.05) (31.65)
30.5L-32 R2 3.48 6.34 16.66 4.21 7.67 20.16

(5.60) (10.21) (26.81) (6.78) (12.35) (32.44)
30.SL-32 R3 3.23 5.88 1S.45 3.91 7.11 18.69

(S.2O) (9.46) (24.86) (6.29) (11.45) (30.08)
67 x 34-30 R2 3.26 S.94 1S.60 3.94 7.18 18.87

(5.25) (9.5S) (25.10) (6.35) (11.56) (30.37)
26
9-11422
SPECIFICATIONS'--_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
27
Rice Combine
Transmission with 32/41 Change Gears
RANGE LO HI
GEAR 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd
SIZE (km/h) (km/h) (km/h) (km/h) (km/h) (km/h)
2BL-26 R2 3.02 5.49 14.43 3.65 6.65 17.46
(4.85) (8.84) (23.23) (5.87) (10.70) (28.10)
24.5-32 R2 3.38 6.15 16.15 4.08 7.44 19.55

(5.43) (9.90) (26.00) (6.57) (11.97) (31.46)
30.5L-32 R2 3.48 6.34 16.66 4.21 7.67 20.16

(5.60) (10.21) (26.81) (6.78) (12.35) (32.44)
67 x 34-30 R2 3.26 5.94 15.56 3.94 7.18 18.B7

(5.25) (9.55) (25.10) (6.35) (11.56) (30.37)
27
9-11422
28 SPECIFICATIONS._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
APPROXIMATE OVERALL MEASUREMENTS

~--------H------------------~
~------------C------------
~---------- 0 ---------------
~-------------E--------------
~--------- F---------------------
146L8
K----
A See Chart (Next Page) H. 289 Inch (7341 mm)

B. 138.2 Inch (3510 mm) I. 76.3 Inch (1 937 mm)
C. 255.7 Inch (6 494 mm) J. 101.3 Inch (2 572 mm)
0.270.1 Inch (6861 mm) K. 109.3 Inch (2775 mm)
E. 309.4 Inch (7 858 mm) L. 144.5 Inch (3 671 mm)
F. 345.6 Inch (8 778 mm) M. 179.7 Inch (4565 mm)
G. 253 Inch (6 427 mm)
NOTE: These dimensions are with the feeder lowered.
28
9-11422
SPEC IFICATIONS,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 29
AXLE CLEARANCE
TIRE LOW HIGH
SIZE
Inch (mm) Inch (mm)
23.1-26 R1 141.5 (3594) 145.0 (3683)
23.1-26 R3 140.4 (3576) 143.9 (3655)
23.1-34 R2 146.6 (3724) 150.0 (3810)
24.5-32 R1 145.5 (3696) 149.0 (3785)
24.5-32 R2 146.5 (3721) 150.0 (3810)
24.5-32 R3 144.2 (3663) 147.7 (3752)
A
28L-26 R1 141.9 (3604) 145.4 (3693)
28L-26 R2 142.7 (3625) 146.2 (3714)
28L-26 R3 140.8 (3587) 144.3 (3666)
30.5L-32 R1 146.0 (3708) 149.5 (3797)
30.5L-32 R2 147.0 (3734) 150.5 (3823)
30.5L-32 R3 144.7 (3675) 148.2 (3764)
67 x 34-30 R2 145.0 (3683) 148.5 (3772)
TRACK 151.5 (3848) 154.3 (3920)
Unloader Height (Combines with 23.1-26 R1 Tires)

Discharge Height .................................................................. 148.9 inch (3 782 mm)
- With Long Tube ....................................................... 156.4 inch (3 973 mm)
Clearance Height .................................................................. 141.3 inch (3 589 mm)
- With Long Tube ....................................................... 148.8 inch (3 779 mm)
Steering
Turning Radius - 67 inch (1 702 mm) Tread ........................... 226 inch (5740 mm)
APPROXIMATE SHIPPING WEIGHT

1660 Grain Combine ................................................................. 18,225 Ib (8284 kg)
1660 Corn Combine .................................................................. 18,510 Ib (8416 kg)
1660 Rice Combine .................................................................. 18,945 Ib (8 611 kg)
1660 Combine With Tracks - Less Header .............................22,945 Ib (10 407 kg)
NOTE: Weight is based on standard equipped combine.
29
9-11422
30 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS
SECTION INDEX
Digital Tachometer ........................ 32-33 Operating Controls (Continued)
Engine Alarm Adjustment.. ............. 33 Header Height Selector
Operation ........................................ 33 Switch (Automatic) ......................... 50
Speed Calibration Adjustment ....... 33 Header Lift Switch .......................... 39
Header Sensitivity Control .............. 50
Instrument Cluster .........................34-35 Heat Control ................................... 44
Ampere Indicator Lamp .................. 35 Key Switch ...................................... 36
Coolant Temperature Gauge.......... 35 Operators Seat ..........................54-57
Coolant Temperature Lamp ........... 35 Deluxe ....................................56-57
Elevator Drive Indicator Lamp ........ 35 Backrest .................................. 57
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge ............ 34 Backrest Extension .................. 57
Engine Oil Pressure Cushion Release Tabs ............ 57
Warning Lamp ................................ 34 Fore/Aft .................................... 57
Fuel Gauge ..................................... 35 Height Adjustment.. ................. 57
Parking Brake Indicator Lamp ........ 34 LH Armrest .............................. 57
Shaker Drive Indicator Lamp .......... 35 Lumbar Adjuster ...................... 57
Voltmeter ......................................... 34 RH Armrest.. ............................ 57
Seat Cushion Angle ................ 57
Operating Controls ........................ 36-57 Seat Isolator ............................ 57
Air Conditioner Control ................... 44 Weight Adjustment.. ................ 57
Air Flow Control Louvers ............... .46 Standard ................................54-55
Air Recirculation Control ................ .47 Backrest .................................. 55
Blower Control ................................ 44 Backrest Extension .................. 55
Brake Latch .................................... 40 Fore/Aft .................................... 55
Brake Pedals ................................. .40 Height Adjustment.. ................. 55
Cigarette Lighter ........................... ..43 LH Armrest .............................. 55
Cleaning Fan Speed Control Lumbar Adjuster ...................... 55
Switch ............................................. 37 RH Armrest. ............................. 55
Dimmer Control .............................. 37 Seat Cushion Angle ................ 55
Dimmer Switch ............................... 41 Weight Adjustment.. ................ 55
Dome Lamp .................................... 42 Packing Brake Control.. .................. 43
Ether Button .................................... 36 Propulsion Control Lever ................ 38
Feeder Clutch Switch ..................... 39 Power Guide Wheel Switch ............ 51
Foot-N-Inch Pedal ........................ ..40 Propulsion Motor Switch ................ 51
Gear Shift Lever .............................. 43 Radio .............................................. 51
Grain Scan Monitor ........................ 52 Reel Lift Switch ............................... 39
Grain Tank Unloader Reel Position Switch ....................... 49
Drive Lever .................................. 42 Reel Speed Control ........................ 49
Grain Tank Unloader Reel Speed Selector Switch ........... 49
Tube Switch ................................ 41 Refrigerant Pressure
Head Lamp Switch ......................... 37 Indicator Lamp .............................. .45
Header Height Control ................... 50 Reverse Button ............................... 39
30
9-11422
INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 31
SECTION INDEX
Operating Controls (Continued)
Rotor Speed Control Switch ........... 37
Separator Drive Switch ................... 39
Shaft Speed Monitor ..................... .48
Spotlight. ......................................... 51
Steering Column Tilt Pedal... .......... 40
Turn Indicator Control. .................... 41
Tum Indicator Lamps .................... .41
Throttle Hand Lever ........................ 36
Ventilation Control Settings ............ 47
Windshield Defrosting Slots ......... ..46
Windshield Wiper Switch ............... .45
31
9-11422
32
INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS
DIGITAL TACHOMETER
This digital tachometer is microprocessor controlled and uses an LED four digit
readout with a fifth alpha character to display each of four selectable speeds.
1. DISPLAY - The display will function whenever the key is in the ON position.
2. TOUCH SWITCH SELECTOR - By means of four touch switches on the face of the
digital tachometer, the operator can select engine RPM, rotor RPM, fan RPM or
vehicle speed (MPH or km/h) to be displayed. The alpha character displayed with
the speed is E, R, F or S respectively, to identify the speed being displayed.
Brightness of the display and backlighting can be varied by the operator using the
Dimmer Control.
3. SPEED CALIBRATION - The digital tachometer contains adjustment to recalibrate

ground speed for various tire sizes.
4. ENGINE ALARM ADJUSTMENT - An alarm function with an adjustable set point

tells the operator when engine speed falls below the set point during the harvesting
operation.
5. ENGINE HOURS - Engine hours will be recorded when the engine is running
whether the key is in the ON or OFF position.
32
9-11422
INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 33
Operation
When the key switch is turned ON, all segments of the display illuminate for one
second as a test. If all the segments are not illuminated, see your dealer.
After one second, the display changes to read 000 and then becomes blank. This
indicates that the digital tachometer is now in the calibration mode. In this mode, the
ENGINE RPM alarm setting can be adjusted and the drive tire loaded radius setting
for the SPEED display can be adjusted.
When the engine is started, the digital tachometer display will show the engine RPM
followed by an E. Select the other functions as follows:
FAN RPM - When this switch is pressed, the fan speed will show in the display
followed by an F.
ROTOR RPM - When this switch is pressed, the rotor speed will show in the display
followed by an R.
SPEED - When this switch is pressed, the vehicle speed in MPH followed by an Swill
show in the display.
NOTE: The digital tachometer can be set to show the vehicle speed in km/h. See your
dealer for instructions to make this setting.
ENGINE RPM - When this switch is pressed, the display will again show the engine
RPM followed by an E.
ENGINE ALARM - When the engine RPM drops below the level set in the digital
tachometer, but is still above 2000 RPM, the audible alarm will sound and the
character on the right of the display will illuminate on and off. The engine RPM alarm
will sound any time the engine RPM drops below the set level, even when the display
is showing the fan speed, rotor speed or the vehicle speed.
NOTE: The separator switch must be in the ON position for the engine alarm function
to operate.
33
9-11422
34
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. VOLTMETER - A voltmeter is used as a charging system indicator to check the

performance of the alternator and voltage regulator. Battery voltage is indicated by
turning the key switch to the ON position with the engine stopped and observing
the voltmeter reading. Check the alternator and voltage by allowing the engine to
operate at low idle and observing the indicated voltage on the voltmeter. Voltage
should be to the right, in the green zone, in all cases. If not, stop the engine and
check for the cause.
2. ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE
3. ENGINE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP - If the engine oil pressure gauge
reading should drop to a pressure significantly below its normal pressure, to a
pressure in the red band on the gauge, and/or the indicator lamp flashes and the
audible signal alarm sounds, shutoff the engine and check the oil level in the crank-
case. Add oil if necessary to bring it to the proper level. Start the engine. If the
gauge still indicates the same low pressure, and/or the indicator lamp flashes and
the audible signal alarm sounds, do not operate the engine. See your dealer.
4. PARKING BRAKE INDICATOR LAMP - The parking brake indicator lamp flashes
and the audible signal alarm sounds when the park brake is engaged and the key
switch is in the ON position.
When the parking brake is disengaged, the indicator lamp will turn OFF and the
alarm will stop.
34
9-11422
INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 35
5. SHAKER DRIVE INDICATOR LAMP (IF EQUIPPED) - When the indicator lamp
flashes and the audible signal alarm sounds, the slip clutch on the shaker drive
shaft is slipping. Stop the engine and check for the cause.
6. ELEVATOR DRIVE INDICATOR LAMP (IF EQUIPPED) - When the indicator lamp
flashes and the audible signal alarm sounds, the slip clutch on the shaker drive
shaft is slipping. Stop the engine and check for the cause.
NOTE: The shaker drive and elevator drive indicator lamps do not function when
the combine is equipped with the shaft speed monitor.
7. AMPERE INDICATOR LAMP - The ampere indicator lamp flashes and the audible
signal alarm sounds when the alternator stops operating properly.
When the indicator lamp flashes and the audible signal alarm sounds, stop the
engine and clean the alternator screen and alternator.
After the alternator has been cleaned and cooled, it should be ready for use.
If the indicator lamp still illuminates and the audible signal alarm sounds, see your
dealer.
8. COOLANT TEMPERATURE INDICATOR LAMP
9. COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE - This gauge shows the temperature of the

coolant circulating through the engine.
Under normal operation, the pOinter should be in the green band. Never operate
the engine when the pOinter is in the red band, and/or the indicator lamp flashes
and the audible signal alarm sounds. If the pOinter fails to reach the green band
during normal operation, check the thermostat.
10. FUEL GAUGE - When the key switch is in the ON position, the fuel gauge
indicates the level of the fuel in the fuel tank.
NOTE: The indicator lamps come on each time the key switch is turned from the ON
position to the START position. Check to make sure the indicator lamps illuminate
each time when starting the engine. If an indicator lamp does not illuminate, check and
replace the bulb before running the engine. See the electrical section in this manual for
the correct replacement bulb.
35
9-11422
36
OPERATING CONTROLS
1. THROTILE HAND LEVER - The throttle lever is used to control the engine speed.
To increase engine speed, move the lever forward. To decrease engine speed,
move the lever to the rear. The throttle hand lever is also used to stop the engine.
2. ETHER BUTION - See Cold Temperature Starting in Operating Instructions.
3. KEY SWITCH - Three position switch
Off Position - With key in vertical position. The engine cannot be started without the
key.
On Position - First position clockwise from OFF. The fuel level, voltmeter and
coolant temperature gauges will indicate their present conditions.
Start Position - Second position clockwise from OFF. All indicator lamps illuminate.
The starter motor will crank the engine if the foot-n-inch pedal is pushed down to
actuate the neutral start switch. Release the key switch when the engine starts to
run. After the engine has started, the indicator lamps will go off.
36
9-11422
37
4. ROTOR SPEED CONTROL SWITCH - Rocker switch operates as follows:
Fast Position - Pushing on the front half of the switch will increase the speed of the
rotor.
Slow Position - Pushing on the rear half of the switch will decrease the speed of the
rotor.
5. CLEANING FAN SPEED CONTROL SWITCH - Rocker switch operates as follows:
Fast Position - Pushing on the front half of the switch will increase the speed of the
cleaning fan.
Slow Position - Pushing on the rear half of the switch will decrease the speed of the
cleaning fan.
6. HEAD LAMP SWITCH - Four position switch operates as follows:
Off Position - All lamps turned off.
Hazard Position - Flashing warning lamps operate. All auxiliary lamps are turned
off when the head lamp switch is moved to this position. Use this pOSition for day
time highway operation.
Road Position - Flashing warning lamps, head lamps, red tail lamps and instru-
ment lamps are illuminated. All auxiliary lamps are turned off when the head lamp
switch is moved to this position. Use this position for night-time highway operation.
Field Position - Head lamp, red tail lamps, instrument lamps, front work lamps,
grain tank lamp and unloader lamp are all illuminated.
7. DIMMER CONTROL - Use this control to adjust the brightness of the instrument
lamps for the digital tachometer, instrument cluster and the monitor.
37
9-11422
38
PROPULSION CONTROL LEVER - Use this lever to control the direction of travel and
the ground speed.
Forward Travel - Move the propulsion

control lever forward from the neutral
detent position to start forward ground
travel. Moving the propulsion control
lever farther forward in the slot increases
the forward travel speed.
Neutral Position - The neutral detent

position is located in the center of the
propulsion control lever slot. Moving the
propulsion control lever toward the
neutral detent position decreases the
ground travel speed. Moving the propul-
sion control lever into the neutral detent
position will stop all ground travel.
Reverse Travel - Move the propulsion

control lever toward the right and then.
rearward from the neutral detent position
to start reverse ground travel. Moving the
propulsion control lever farther rearward
in the slot increases the reverse travel
speed.
38
9-11422
RH Panel
1. HEADER LIFT SWITCH - Three position rocker switch operates as follows:

Up Position - Pushing on the upper half of the switch will raise the header.
Off Position - The switch automatically returns to the center, OFF, position when
the switch is released.
Down Position - Pushing on the lower half of the switch will lower the header.
2. REEL LIFT SWITCH - Pull the switch rearward to raise the reel. Push the switch
forward to lower the reel. Release the switch to hold the reel at the selected height.
3. FEEDER CLUTCH SWITCH - Three position switch.
On Position - Lift and push the switch forward to the ON, position to engage the
feeder.
Off Position - This is the center position of the switch.
Reverse Position (IF EQUIPPED) - Lift and pull the switch back to REVERSE, to
operate the feeder reverse.
4. REVERSE BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED) - Hold the feeder clutch switch in the
REVERSE position. Push down and hold reverse button to reverse the feeder for
clearing a plugged feeder or header.
5. SEPARATOR DRIVE SWITCH - Two position switch.
Lifting and pushing the switch forward to ON, engages the separator drive.
Pulling the switch rearward to OFF, disengages the separator drive.
39
9-11422
40 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS
Floor Controls
1. FOOT-N-INCH PEDAL - This pedal is used to engage the drive to the wheels
(pedal fully up) or to disengage the drive to the wheels (pedal fully down).
NOTE: The propulsion control lever must be in the forward or reverse slot in order
for the foot-n-inch pedal to start the combine in motion. If the propulsion control
lever is in the NEUTRAL POSITION, the combine will not move.
The foot-n-inch pedal can be used to control inching, very slight movement of the
combine, by raising the pedal a small amount from the full down position. When the
combine starts to move, pushing the foot-n-inch pedal fully down will disengage
the drive to stop the movement.
The foot-n-inch pedal also actuates the neutral start switch. The pedal must be fully
down before the starting motor will operate.
2. STEERING COLUMN TILT PEDAL - To move the steering column to another posi-
tion. push the tilt pedal and move the column. To lock the steering column in the
selected position. release the tilt pedal.
3. BRAKE PEDALS - The LH pedal stops the LH drive wheel and the RH pedal stops
the RH drive wheel. For LH or RH turning. use the pedals separately. For safe
operation on roads. use the pedals together.
4. BRAKE LATCH - The brake latch can be used to lock both brake pedals together
so both pedals can be actuated easily at the same time.
h. Brake pedals must be locked together for road travel. This will insure
. . uniform brake application and maximum stopping ability.
M112
40
9-11422
INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS 41
Steering Column
1. TURN INDICATOR CONTROL - To indicate that you will turn the combine to the
RIGHT, move the turn indicator control to the right. To indicate that you will turn the
combine to the LEFT, move the turn indicator control to the left. Center position is
OFF.
The turn indicator control can be used with the flashing warning lamps to indicate a
turn. When a turn is to be signaled, the flashing warning lamp opposite the direc-
tion of the turn becomes steady burning until such time that the turn signal is can-
celed. The flashing warning lamp in the direction of the tum increases its flashing
rate until the turn signal is canceled.
2. TURN INDICATOR LAMPS - The turn indicator lamps behind the steering wheel will
flash to indicate the direction of turn.
3. DIMMER SWITCH - Two position switch. Use this switch to select the high beam or
low beam head lamp when the Head Lamp Switch is in the ROAD or FIELD posi-
tion.
4. GRAIN TANK UNLOADER TUBE SWITCH - Push the switch up to swing the
unloader tube out. Push the switch down to swing the unloader tube in.
41
9-11422
42
Grain Tank Unloader Drive Lever

Use this lever to engage and disengage
the unloader drive as follows:
On Position - Move the grain tank
unloader drive lever up and rearward to
engage the unloader drive.
Off Position - Move the grain tank

unloader drive lever forward and down to
disengage the unloader drive.
Dome Lamp
The dome lamp is located at the center of the front headliner and is connected directly
to the battery. It is controlled by a 3 position rocker switch. The 3 position rocker switch
operates as follows:
Front Position - The lamp will operate with the door switch. The lamp will be ON when
the cab door is open and will be OFF when the cab door is closed.
Center Position - The lamp will be OFF.
Rear Position - The lamp will be ON continuously until the switch is moved to the
center (OFF) position or front (door) position.
NOTE: To prevent discharging the batteries, put the lamp switch in the front or center
position when leaving the cab.
42
9-11422
LH Panel
1. CIGARETIE LIGHTER
2. PARKING BRAKE CONTROL - To engage the parking brake. push the LH brake
pedal down. While holding the brake pedal down. lift and turn the parking brake
control to lock the LH brake in the engaged position. Remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
To release the parking brake. push down on the LH brake pedal. While holding the
brake pedal down. turn and push down on the parking brake control. Release the
brake pedal.
NOTE: When the key switch is in the ON position and the parking brake is engaged,
the indicator lamp on the instrument cluster will illuminate and an audible alarm will
sound to indicate that the parking brake is engaged.
3. GEAR SHIFT LEVER - Use the lever to shift the gears in the transmission as follows:
First. Second and Third Gear - Various ground speeds are obtained in each trans-
mission range. see travel speeds for ground travel speeds.
43
9-11422
44
INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
RH Headliner
1. BLOWER CONTROL - To select the blower speed, turn the switch clockwise from
OFF to Low, Medium or High.
NOTE: Operate the blower at medium or high speed to assure a sufficient volume ofair
to maintain cab pressure and keep the cab dust free.
2. HEAT CONTROL - Turn the control clockwise to turn the heat ON. Adjust the
control to the needed temperature. Turn the blower control to the medium or high
position. Turn the heat control counterclockwise to turn the heat off.
3. AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL - Turn the blower control to the medium or high po-
sition, then turn the air conditioner control clockwise to turn the air conditioner ON.
Adjust the control to the needed temperature. Turn the control counterclockwise to
turn the air conditioner OFF.
NOTE: During an extended non-operating period, such as seasonal storage, and if

the temperature is above 43°F (6°C), startthe engine and operate the air conditioner for
a few minutes each month to keep the compressor seal lubricated.
44
9-11422
4. REFRIGERANT PRESSURE INDICATOR LAMP - The air conditioner has a warning
lamp located on the headliner control panel. When the air conditioner control is
turned on and the warning lamp activates, it tells the operator that the high or low
pressure switch has cut power to the compressor clutch. This may be caused by
low refrigerant charge, condensor plugging or cool outdoor conditions.
Restart the air conditioner by either: (1) turning the air conditioner control to the
OFF poSition, (2) turning the blower control to the OFF position, or (3) turning the
key switch to the OFF position. Returning any of these controls to the original posi-
tion will restart the air conditioner.
If the indicator lamp continually glows after restart, the cause of the excessive
pressure Situation must be investigated.
5. WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH - Turn the switch clockwise to turn the wiper on and
adjust the speed. Turn the switch counterclockwise to turn the wiper OFF.
45
9-11422
46 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Air Flow Control Louvers
The cab air is discharged through four air control louvers located in the front
headliner. These are adjustable up or down. to the left or right. and are closeable to
permit the operator to control air flow direction as desired.
Windshield Defrosting Slots

Six slots in the front of the headliner can
be used to direct heated air to the
windshield for defrosting. Sliding one of
the control knobs to the right, opens the
slots. Sliding one of the control knobs to
the left. closes the slots. Close the slots
during humid weather when moist air
condenses on the windshield.
46
9-11422
Air Recirculation Control
The air recirculation control regulates the amount of fresh air and
recirculated air entering the cab.
For maximum fresh air, loosen the control knob and push it to the forward
end of the slot and tighten.
For maximum recirculation, loosen the control knob and push it to the
rear end of the slot and tighten. Intermediate positioning of the control
knob in the slot is available to the operator for delivery of fresh and
recirculated air.
Maximum recirculation is recommended for fast cool down or fast heat up of the cab.
Maximum fresh air is recommended to help keep the cab dust free.
Ventilation Control Settings

Recirculation
Comfort Blower Control Control Louver
Condition Setting Position Position Direction
Pressure Medium As Required Forward Around Operator
Cool Medium Maximum Cool Rearward Around Operator
Heat Low Maximum Heat Rearward Around Operator
Dehumidify* Low Heat as Required Rearward Around Operator

Maximum Cool
High setting provides maximum air flow in the cab enclosure; continuous use of this
setting will not generally provide optimum comfort conditions.
*Dehumidify also useful in humid conditions if condensation occurs on inside of
windshield.
47
9-11422
48
Shaft Speed Monitor
The shaft speed monitor control panel is installed below the RH headliner control
panel. The control panel has two control knobs, one touch switch and nine indicator
lamp panels. The indicator lamp panels cannot be seen until the indicator lamps are
illuminated. The RH control knob adjusts the alarm set point for the fan shaft. The LH
control knob adjusts the alarm set point for the rotor shaft. The touch switch can be
used to turn the audible alarm off when the monitor gets a low speed signal from one
of the shaft speed sensors.
The nine shaft speeds that the monitor checks are the feeder, rotor, cleaning fan,
shoe, grain elevator, tailings elevator, beater/chopper, spreader and air screen.
o
-"'0'
,
,
00
\
<:> o
174L7
48
9-11422
OPTIONAL OPERATING CONTROLS

Reel Controls
1. REEL SPEED CONTROL - This control is used to adjust the operating speed of the
reel. The reel speed is adjustable from zero RPM to full speed. Tum the control
clockwise to increase reel speed or counterclockwise to decrease reel speed.
The selected speed will remain constant and will not vary with the combine
ground speed.
On units equipped with a Reel Speed Selector Switch, the Reel Speed Control
A. Selector Switch in Manual Position. Manually adjust the reel speed as speci-
fied above.
B. Selector Switch in Automatic Position. Use the reel speed control to set the
ratio of reel speed to ground speed. The reel speed will automatically
increase or decrease with the combine ground speed.
2. REEL SPEED SELECTOR SWITCH - This is a two position rocker switch used to
select either automatic or manual reel speed operation described as follows:
Automatic Position - Push the front of the switch to select automatic reel speed
operation. The reel speed will automatically increase or decrease with the
combine ground speed. Tne ratio of reel speed to ground speed can be adjusted
as needed.
Manual Position - Push the rear of the switch, to select manual reel speed opera-
tion. The reel speed will not be affected by ground speed. The reel speed can be
adjusted as needed.
3. REEL POSITION SWITCH - Three position rocker switch operates as follows:
Rear (Aft) Position - Pushing on the rear half of the switch will move the reel rear-
ward.
OFF POSITION - The switch automatically returns to the center, OFF, position
when the switch is released.
Forward (Fore) Position - Pushing on the front half of the switch will move the reel
forward.
49
9-11422
50 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Header Controls
1. HEADER HEIGHT CONTROL - This control allows the operator to set the desired
height of the header above the ground when the header height selector switch is in
the automatic position. Rotate the control clockwise to raise and counterclockwise
to lower the header.
2. HEADER SENSITIVITY CONTROL - This control allows the operator to determine

the response of the system to changes in header height. If the header is not fol-
lowing the ground closely enough, the operator must rotate the sensitivity control
clockwise. If the header moves too frequently, the operator must rotate the control
counterclockwise.
3. AUTOMATIC HEADER HEIGHT SELECTOR SWITCH - Two position switch

Automatic Position - Pushing on the front half of the switch will actuate the
automatic mode of operation. In the automatic mode, the header will automatically
raise or lower with the contour of the field.
Manual Position - Pushing on the rear half of the switch will actuate the manual
mode of operation. In the manual mode, the header is raised or lowered by the
header lift switch on the propulsion control lever.
50
9-11422
INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-,-_ __
51
,II
Power Guide and Propulsion Motor
1. POWER GUIDE WHEEL SWITCH - Pushing on the front half of the switch to ON,
engages the power guide wheels. Pushing on the rear half of the switch to OFF
disengages the power guide wheels.
2. PROPULSION MOTOR SWITCH - Push on the front half of the switch for high range
and fast speeds. Push on the rear half of the switch for low range and slow speeds.
NOTE: The propulsion motor will not operate in high range when the gear shift
lever is moved into the third gear position on Grain/Corn combines with 36/37
changes gears.
Radio Spotlight
. :"':'.:', .:.: ,:;":"

:r~
The spotlight is controlled from inside the

cab. A two position switch is used to turn
the spotlight ON and OFF. Turning the
handle will move the lamp head to the left
Radio equipment to fit the LH headliner or right. Rotating the entire spotlight
control panel is available from your control will move the lamp head up or
dealer. down.
51
9-11422
52
GRAIN SCAN MONITOR
The grain scan monitor, if equipped, consists of a control console and four grain
sensors. Two grain sensors are mounted toward the rear of the rotor cage and two
grain sensors are mounted on the rear comers of the chaffer sieve. The sensors
indicate the amount of grain loss during the harvesting operation. This information is
indicated on the console meter. The operator uses the grain loss information to
operate the combine at the most efficient speed with an acceptable amount of grain
loss.
1. SENSOR SWITCH - The four position switch operates as follows:

OFF - All power to the grain scan monitor is off.
Chaffer - Only the chaffer sensors are connected to the monitor. Grain loss infor-
mation from these two sensors is indicated on the meter.
Rotor - Only the rotor cage sensors are connected to the monitor. Grain loss in-
formation from these two sensors is indicated on the meter.
Both - All four sensors are connected to the monitor. This is the normal operating
position for the sensor switch.
52
9-11422
53
2. METER POSITION CONTROL - Turn the control clockwise or counterclockwise to

set the position of the meter needle on the meter scale.
3. GRAIN SELECTOR CONTROL - Turn the control clockwise or counterclockwise to

adjust the sensor sensitivity for the grain size. Small soft grains such as clover and
alfalfa require a more sensitive setting (small dot) than the large hard grains such
as wheat (medium dot) or corn (large dot).
4. SENSOR INDICATOR PANELS - The sensor indicator panels have marks, 1

through 4. The panels illuminate on and off as material hits the sensors or from
machine vibration. (Tells you the sensors are working). Panels 1 and 2 are for the
chaffer sensors. Panels 3 and 4 are for the rotor sensors.
NOTE: The illumination of the panels should only be used as an indication that the
sensors are working, and not for the actual amount of loss.
5. METER -The meter pointer indicates an increase or decrease in grain loss from the
acceptable level for which the monitor has been adjusted. The change in the meter
indication is used by the operator as a guide on how to change the harvesting
operation - speed up, slow down, make adjustments.
53
9-11422
54 INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
OPERATORS SEATS
T85268.60
···~5
54
9-11422
55
Your operators seat is equipped with controls to allow you to adjust the seat for your
personal comfort. Adjust the seat as follows:
1. WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT - The numbers on the indicator show weight in kilograms.

Dividing the operators weight, in pounds by two will be approximately the weight in
kilograms. Tum the adjusting handle until this amount shows on the indicator.
Make additional adjustments as needed for personal comfort.
2. HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT - The seat can be adjusted to three positions. To raise the
seat, hold the seat cushion and lift until the seat engages the next position. To
lower the seat, lift the cushion to the upper limit. The seat will return to the bottom
position and can be readjusted.
3. BACKREST EXTENSION - The backrest extension can be removed by lifting until

the extension is clear of the backrest.
4. LH ARMREST - The left armrest can be lifted until even with the backrest.
5. FORE/AFT - To adjust the fore/aft position move the lever up. Move the seat to the
the needed position and release the lever. The lever will return to the locked
position and hold the seat stationary.
6. SEAT CUSHION ANGLE - The seat cushion angle can be adjusted to three
positions. Pull the lever forward and move the seat cushion to the needed position.
Release the lever to lock the seat in position.
7. LUMBAR ADJUSTER - Rotate the knob to adjust the curve of the back cushion for
personal comfort.
8. BACKREST - To adjust the backrest lift the release lever. Tilt the backrest to the
needed position. Release the lever to keep the backrest in position
9. RH ARMREST - The right armrest is located on the console. To adjust the right
armrest loosen the two lock knobs and move the armrest into position. Tighten the
lock knobs.
55
9-11422
56
INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Deluxe Seat
T85266.50
56
9-11422
Your operators seat is equipped with controls to allow you to adjust the seat for your
personal comfort. Adjust the seat as follows:
1. SEAT ISOLATOR - The operator seat can be set for isolator operation in the
selected fore/aft position. The isolator will allow the seat to move fore and aft with
the operator to absorb shocks and reduce operator fatigue when operating on
rough terrain. To set for isolator operation, move the lever to the left. The seat will
be free to move fore and aft within the travel limits of the isolator. To lock the seat
isolator and hold the seat stationary, move the lever to the right.
2. SEAT CUSHION ANGLE - Rotating the knob will tilt the seat cushion for personal
comfort.
3. BACKREST EXTENSION - The backrest extension can be adjusted by pushing

down or pulling up to the desired height. The extension can be removed from the
cushion by pulling up until free of the backrest.
4. LH ARMREST - The left armrest can be lifted until even with the backrest.
5. BACKREST - To adjust the backrest, lift the release lever. Tilt the backrest to the
needed position. Release the lever to keep the backrest in position.
6. FORE/AFT - To adjust the fore/aft position of the seat, move the lever up. Move the
seat to the needed position and release the lever. The lever will return to the locked
position and hold the seat stationary.
7. HEIGHT AND WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT - The weight adjustment can be made by

lifting the lever up. The seat will raise or lower automatically adjusting for the
operators weight. Release the lever.
The seat can be raised or lowered pneumatically to the needed position by lifting
the lever and moving it horizontally to one of three settings. The seat will raise or
lower automatically.
8. CUSHION RELEASE TABS - The seat cushions can be removed for cleaning.
Remove the seat cushions by lifting the release tabs and rotating ninety degrees.
The cushion may now be lifted away from the seat base.
9. LUMBAR ADJUSTER - Rotate the knob to adjust the curve of the back cushion for
personal comfort.
10. RH ARMREST - The right armrest is located on the console. To adjust the right
armrest, loosen the two lock knobs and move the armrest into position. Tighten
the lock knobs.
57
9-11422
58
58
9-11422
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 59
SECTION INDEX
Accumulator ....................................... 85 Normal Starting Procedure ...........64-65
Amber Warning Lamps .................... 106 Operators Platform and

Ladder ....................................... 102-1 05
Audible Alarm and Indicator Pivoting Ladder ...... ....................... 104
Lamp Test .......................................... 61 Positions .................................... 105
Stationary Ladder .................. 102-1 03
Before Starting Engine ....................... 60 Platform Extensions .................. 102
Positions .................................... 103
Combine Operation ....................... 76-80
Ground Travel Speed ..................... 76 Run in Procedure ............................... 62
Starting Combine Operation .......... 79 First Service Intervals ..................... 63
Starting Ground Travel ................... 77
Stopping Ground Travel ................. 78 Speed Shaft Monitor .....................86-88
Threshing Speed ............................ 80
SMV Symbol ..................................... 106
Cold Temperature Operation ........67-71
Coolant Heater ............................... 68 Standing Fluid Container
Starting ......................................69-70 Replacement ...................................... 71
Digital Tachometer ........................ 74-75 Stopping the Engine .......................... 66

Adjusting Engine Alarm .................. 74
Adjusting Speed Calibration ........... 75 Towing ................................................ 73
Directional Turn Signals ................... 106 Transporting the Combine ................. 72
Feeder Operation ........................94-1 00 Unloader Operation .......................... 101

Feeder Adjustment for
Tire Size ................................... 98-1 00
Feeder Reverser ............................. 95
Reversing the Feeder ..................... 94
Rock Trap ..................................95-97
First Service Intervals ......................... 63
Grain Scan Monitor .......................89-93
Header Control ..............................81-85

Automatic Header Height
Control .......................................81-82
Automatic Reel Speed Control .. 83-84
59
9-11422
60
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

Before starting the combine for the first time and before each operating period after
that, make these checks:
1. Make sure all persons that operate or do maintenance understand that clean
fuel is important. '
2. Check all lubrication pOints as shown in the Lubrication Charts.
3. Check the oil level in the engine crankcase. Check the fluid level in the hydraulic
reservoir.
4. Check that the fuel tank is filled with clean fuel that meets the specifications
given in this manual.
NOTE: Clean around the fuel tank cap before you remove the cap.
5. Check the fuel system, cooling system and engine oil pan for leaks.
6. Check that the alternator and compressor belts are adjusted correctly.
7. Remove any water or sediment from the water separator filter.
8. Check the air pressure of the tires.
9. Check the coolant level in the radiator. Add water and Ethylene Glycol coolant
as needed.
10. Check to make sure the audible alarm and indicator lamps operate correctly.
Before starting engine study Operators Manual safety messages.

Read all safety signs on machine.
Clear the area of other persons.
Learn and practice safe use of controls before. operating.
It is your responsibility to understand and follow manufacturers
instructions on machine operation. service. and to observe pertinent
laws and regulations.
Operator and Service Manuals may be obtained from your
equipment dealer. M103
60
9-11422
AUDIBLE ALARM AND INDICATOR LAMP TEST
The indicator lamps and alarm are used to alert the operator when attention is
required at some unit of the combine. They should be tested before starting the
combine engine.
Do not press the foot-n-inch pedal down. When the key switch is turned to the START
position. the alarm (an intermittent buzzing) can be heard. and all indicator lamps will
illuminate. If the alarm and indicator lamps fail to operate correctly. make repairs
before starting the engine.
Pressing the foot-n-inch pedal down and/or starting the engine will stop the alarm. All
indicator lamps except for parking brake indicator lamp must go off after the engine
has started.
NOTE: If the alarm sounds and/or an indicator lamp illuminates during operation. im-
mediate corrective action must be taken.
61
9-11422
62
RUN-IN PROCEDURE
If run-in instructions for a new engine are not followed, you can cause damage to
piston rings and cylinder sleeves.
Engine Warm Up
Before operating in the field, warm up the engine by running the engine for 10 to 15
minutes at 1/2 throttle.
1st Hour
Operate the combine in second gear with the engine running at full throttle. Adjust the
ground speed so that the load on the engine does not exceed 1/2 of maximum engine
load.
2nd Through 5th Hour

Run the engine at full throttle. Adjust the ground speed so that the load on the engine
does not exceed 3/4 of maximum load.
6th Through 15th Hour

Run the engine at full throttle. Adjust the ground speed to match the crop conditions. If
high loads occur, reduce ground speeds to avoid continued engine loading above
3/4 maximum load.
After First 25 Hours

Replace the hydraulic fluid filter, see Page 246.
Engine Oil
New combines have break-in oil in the engine. This oil can be used for the first 100
hours in temperatures from -10 to gO°F (-23 to 32°C). Add make-up oil following the
recommendations in the LUBRICATION/FILTERSIFLUIDS section. Do not add
kerosene for cold weather starting. If temperatures are not in the specified range,
drain the oil. Replace the oil with the correct viscosity.
62
9-11422
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 63
First Service Intervals

It is recommended that the first service intervals be used on the following ser-
vice pOints before using the service intervals given in this manual.
After First Hour

DRIVE AND STEERING WHEELS - Check the torque on the hub nuts and bolts after
the first hour of operation, then every 10 hours of operation for the first week.

BELT DRIVES, CHAIN DRIVES AND CONVEYORS - Check the tension on all belt
drives, chain drives and conveyors after the first 10 hours, then every 10 hours until the
tension stabilizes.

HYDRAULIC FLUID FILTER - Replace the hydraulic fluid and the hydraulic fluid filter.
HEADER LIFT FILTER - Replace the header lift filter when the hydraulic fluid is
changed.

PLANETARY GEAR POWER GUIDE WHEELS (IF EQUIPPED) - Change the lubricant
in each planetary.
FEEDER ADAPTER MOUNTING BOLT - Check the torque on the mounting bolts.

COOLANT SYSTEM FILTER CONDITIONER - Replace the coolant system filter condi-
tioner.
HYDRAULIC FLUID FILTER - Replace the hydraulic fluid and the hydraulic fluid filter.
HEADER LIFT FILTER - Replace the header lift filter when the hydraulic fluid is
changed.
63
9-11422
64
NORMAL STARTING PROCEDURE

IMPORTANT: It is important that enough lubricant reaches the turbocharger bearings
before operating the engine at rated speed.
Put all controls in Neutral or OFF posi-

tions. Hold the throttle hand lever in the 1/3
throttle position.
Turn the air conditioning temperature Turn the key switch to the ON position
control to the OFF position. and START position to check the indi-
cator lamps and audible alarm.
The separator drive switch must be in the Push the foot-n-inch pedal fully down.
OFF position.
64
9-11422
65
Turn key switch to the START position Resetthe throttle hand lever to 1500 RPM
until engine starts, but no more than 30 when the oil pressure is correct.
seconds, then release the key.
/ls soon as the engine starts, set the

throttle hand lever at 1000 to 1200 RPM
to make sure oil reaches all areas in the
engine. Check the oil pressure gauge; if
there is no oil pressure, stop the engine
and check for the cause.
IMPORTANT
1. If the engine starts and then stops, wait for the starting motor to stop turning before
you tum the key switch to the START position again.
2. Do not use the starting motor for more than 30 seconds. Wait one minute between
starts so the batteries can charge and the starting motor can cool.
3. If the engine stops when operating with a load, immediately start the engine again
to prevent too much heat caused by stopping the flow of oil for cooling and lubri-
cation.
65
9-11422
66
STOPPING THE ENGINE

IMPORTANT: When stopping the engine after operating under heavy load, run the
engine at low idle speed (1000 RPM) for 3 to 5 minutes. This will allow the engine and
turbocharger temperature to decrease gradually.
Put the transmission shift lever into the Tum the key switch to the OFF position.
neutral position and engage the parking Remove the key.
brake.
Put the throttle hand lever in the ENGINE

STOP pOSition.
1'>.. Before leaving the machine, lower attachments, place all controls in
. . . neutral, and set the parking brake, stop the engine, and remove the
key from the ignition switch. ~'224A
66
9-11422
67
COLD TEMPERATURE OPERATION

IMPORTANT: During cold ambient temperatures never run the engine at low idle
speed for long periods of time. Never run the engine for long periods of time when the
coolant temperature is below normal.
To start and operate your combine during cold ambient temperatures:
1. BATIERIES - Must have a full charge.
2. FUEL - Must be clean and with no water.
3. ENGINE OIL - Must have the correct viscosity for the ambient temperature range.
4. TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC FLUID - Use CASE IH HY-TRAN® PLUS.
5. COOLING SYSTEM - Must have a minimum of 50 percent Ethylene Glycol solution

for protection.
6. STOPPING THE ENGINE - Permit the engine temperature to decrease before

stopping.
7. CONDENSATION IN FUEL TANK - To prevent condensation in the fuel tank and

water entering the fuel system, fill the fuel tank after each operating day.
8. FUEL TANK WATER TRAP - During cold ambient temperatures, make sure you
remove water from the water trap each day or damage will occur.
During cold ambient temperatures, the engine will not heat to or keep the rated ope-
rating temperature at slow engine speeds. Slow engine speeds in cold temperatures
can cause damage to the engine. Use the following procedures to warm the engine
and hydraulic fluid and to keep the correct operating temperatures.
1. WARMING THE ENGINE AND HYDRAULIC FLUID.

A. Start the engine using the procedure shown in this manual.
B. Warm the hydraulic fluid to operating temperature, run the engine at 1500 RPM
for approximately five minutes.
IMPORTANT: Operating the combine with cold hydraulic fluid can cause rough
operation with possible injury to the operator.
67
9-11422
68
2. KEEP ENGINE AT CORRECT OPERATING TEMPERATURE - When the engine is
operating in cold ambient temperatures without a load, keep the engine warm by
running the engine at approximately 1500 RPM.
3. STOPPING THE ENGINE - Run the engine at slow speed for 3 to 5 minutes. This
will permit the engine temperature to decrease gradually before stopping the
engine.
Coolant Heater
The engine cylinder block has a passage on the left hand side for the installation of a
coolant heater kit. You can get a coolant heater kit from your Dealer.
To install the coolant heater kit:

1. Remove some coolant from the cylinder block.
2. Put a hole in the cup plug and pull the plug out. Do not drill the plug.
3. Install the heater according to instructions given in the kit.
179L7
68
9-11422
69
Engine Starting Using Ether Starting Fluid

To start the engine at cold ambient temperatures of 20°F (-6.7°C) or lower, use ether
starting fluid according to the following procedure.
Put the throttle hand lever in the full

Put all controls in Neutral or OFF position. throttle position.
Turn the key switch to the ON position

Turn off the air conditioning control. and START positions to check the
audible alarm and indicator lamps.
The separator drive switch must be in the Push down on the foot-n-inch pedal.
OFF position.
69
9-11422
70
Turn the key switch to START position. As soon as the engine starts and reaches
1500 RPM. move the engine speed con-
trol to hold 1500 RPM until the engine is
stable.
Push the ether button for one to two sec-

onds while turning the engine for the
maximum of 30 seconds.
When the engine starts, check the oil
pressure gauge. If there is no oil pres-
NOTE: If the engine fires, but does not
sure, stop the engine and check for the
start in the first 30 seconds, repeat Steps
cause.
7 and 8. If the engine does not fire, check
for an empty ether container.
70
9-11422
71
Starting Fluid Container Replacement

Install a container of Starting Fluid as follows:
1. Turn the lock nut counterclockwise to loosen and then remove the empty
container.
2. Remove the safety cap and plastic nozzle from the new fluid container.
3. Put the new fluid container in the clamp and tighten the lock nut to hold the
container in position.
A Ether cans are explosive. Observe the precautions printed on the

container. Ether must be in twelve ounce containers meeting ICC 20
specifications. Remove ether can from the machine in hot weather.
M193
If you operate the combine without a fluid

container in the starting fluid solenoid,
install the bottom holes of the clamp on
. the tabs of the starting fluid solenoid.
Turn the lock nut clockwise until tight.
This will prevent dirt and dust from
entering into the starting fluid solenoid.
71
9-11422
72
TRANSPORTING THE COMBINE
Before Transporting
1. Empty the grain tank. 3. Raise the header high enough for
good ground clearance.
2. Swing the unloader tube into the
transport position. If transporting long
distances, 10 miles (16 km) or more,
install the hair pin clip to hold the
unloader tube in place.
Highway Operation
1. Comply with state and local laws 4. Keep to the right as far as possible.
goveming highway safety regulations. 5. Turn the amber warning lamps on.
2. Maintain complete control of the Make sure that the SMV symbol can
combine. DO NOT exceed 20 MPH be seen.
(32 km/h).
6. Check clearance before going under-
3. Connect the brake pedals together electric lines, bridges or into build-
with the brake latch. Make sure that ings.
the combine brakes are correctly
adjusted.
72
9-11422
73
TOWING
IMPORTANT: To prevent damage to the combine, the towing speed must not
exceed 20 MPH (32 km/h).
The transmission gear shift lever must be in the neutral position. The propulsion
control lever must also be in the neutral position. Damage to the hydraulic system can
be caused by not following these instructions.
NOTE: If the combine is equipped with power guide wheels, put the power guide
wheel switch in the OFF position. On combines with planetary gear type drive, install
the hub lockouts to disengage the drive hubs.
73
9-11422
74
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
DIGITAL TACHOMETER
Adjusting Engine Alarm
The engine alarm can be set to sound when the engine RPM drops below a speed of
2450 RPM. Adjust the engine alarm as follows:
1. With the engine stopped, turn the key switch to the ON position.
2. Wait one second for the display to change from showing all the display segments
illuminated to showing 000 and then becomes blank. Press the ENGINE RPM
switch.
3. Use a small screwdriver to turn the engine alarm adjustment screw, marked E, on
the front of the digital tachometer. Turn the engine alarm adjustment screw until the
required speed, 2450 RPM, shows on the display.
NOTE: Once the engine alarm has been adjusted, the alarm will sound when the
engine RPM drops be/ow the set speed until a new engine alarm adjustment is made.
74
9-11422
75
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Adjusting Speed Calibration

The digital tachometer can be calibrated for the size of the drive wheels being used.
This adjustment must be made for the digital tachometer to show the correct vehicle
speed. Make the adjustment as follows:
1. Find the static loaded radius of the

drive tires in inches by adding the
..J I~==""'=======
loaded tire height (Dimension 1) to
one half of the rim diameter
(Dimension 2).
EXAMPLE:
Dimension 1 equals .............. 15.25 inch
Dimension 2 equals ................ 28.5 inch
1/2 of Dimension 2
equals ................................ 14.25 inch
15.25 inch
+ 14.25 inch
29.5 inch
The static loaded radius of the drive tires

is 29.5 inch.
2. With the engine stopped, turn the key switch to the ON position.
3. Wait one second for the display to change from showing all the display segments
illuminated to showing 000 and then becomes blank. Press the SPEED switch.
NOTE: If the digital tachometer is already in the calibration mode to check or adjust
another function, the key switch does not have to be turned off and back on again.
Pressing the SPEED switch will set the digital tachometer for adjusting the speed
calibration.
4. Use a small screwdriver to turn the speed calibration screw, marked S, on the front
of the digital tachometer. Turn the speed calibration screw until static loaded
radius shows in the display.
NOTE: Once the speed calibration has been adjusted, this adjustment will not have to
be made again, until different size drive tires have been installed on the unit.
NOTE: This adjustment can not be made when the Digital Tachometer has been set
for a combine equipped with tracks.
75
9-11422
76
COMBINE OPERATION
Ground Travel Speed
Power is transferred from the engine to the three speed transmission by the hydros-
tatic drive unit. Different ground speeds are available in each transmission gear
range. The ground travel speeds are shown under "Approximate Travel Speeds" in
Specifiction section. Use the digital tachometer to check the ground travel speed.
The correct ground speed is important, as too fast of a ground speed will cause an
overload condition, while a speed that is too slow will not give efficient operation. A
ground speed that is too fast over rough terrain will cause early wear and possible
damage to the combine.
Travel speed should be such that complete control and machine sta-
I",.
bility is maintained at al1 times. Where possible, avoid operating near
. . ditches, embankments and holes. Reduce speed when turning,
crossing slopes, and on rough, slick, or muddy surfaces.
M109A
76
9-11422
Starting Ground Travel

STEP 4 ----.
Start the engine.

Moving the propulsion control lever for-
ward will cause the combine to move for-
ward. Moving the lever farther forward will
increase travel speed in that trans-
mission gear.
Press the foot-n-inch pedal fully down

and move the transmission control lever
to the proper gear. Release the foot-
n-inch pedal.
To reverse the direction of the combine,

move the propulsion control lever to
neutral, then push the lever to the right
and pull rearward. Reverse will have the
same travel speeds as forward.
Press the LH brake pedal down and re-

lease the park brake control. Release the
LH brake pedal.
77
9-11422
78
Stopping Ground Travel
The combine can be stopped by moving Press the LH brake pedal down and
the propulsion control lever to the engage the park brake control. Release
"NEUTRAL" position. the LH brake pedal.
The combine can also be stopped by

pressing the foot-n-inch pedal fully
down. The brakes must also be applied
when the foot-n-inch pedal is pressed
down.
A When going downhill. do not move the propulsion control to neutral

position. Do not push down on the foot-n-inch pedal. The engine and
transmission will help control the machine speed. M178
78
9-11422
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 79
Starting Combine Operation
With the engine running at low idle, Use the digital tachometer to check the
engage the separator drive and feeder engine, rotor and fan speeds. Adjust the
clutch drive. speeds as necessary, see "Initial Crop
Settings" in Field Operation Section.
Run the engine at low idle for 15 to 30

seconds until the separator and feeder When harvesting with a grain header,
drive are up to speed. Then, move the adjust the header controls, see Header
throttle hand lever to the full throttle posi- Control.
tion.
79
9-11422
80
Threshing Speed
The throttle hand lever must be in the full throttle position when threshing.
Do not use the throttle hand lever to slow the combine through bad field conditions.
This will slow the entire combine and cause a reduction in threshing performance.
To slow the combine travel speed, move the propulsion control lever back, or shift to
the next lower transmission gear.
80
9-11422
81
HEADER CONTROL
Automatic Header Height Control
If the combine and the header are equipped with automatic header height control,
engage the control as follows:
Move the header height selector switch Turn the header height control knob to
to the AUTO position. raise or lower the header to the desired
height. During operation, the header will
STEP 2 raise or lower as needed to keep the
desired height above the ground.
~,.,
Push and release the DOWN position on

the header lift switch. The header will
lower to the height set by the header
height control knob.
81
9-11422
82
Turn the header sensitivity control When in automatic operation the header
counterclockwise, this will set the lift switch will function as follows:
response time of the automatic header
height control to the fastest setting. 1. When the UP position on the header
lift switch is pushed, the header will
As the contour of the ground changes, raise until the switch is released or
the header will move up or down quickly until the header reaches maximum
to keep the cutter bar on the header at the height.
selected height above the ground.
2. When the DOWN position on the
If the response rate is too fast, turn the header lift switch is pushed and
header sensitivity control clockwise to released, the header will
slow the response rate. automatically lower to the height set
by the header height control knob.
3. When the DOWN position on the

header lift switch is pushed and held,
the switch will override the height set
by the header height control knob.
The header will continue to lower until
the switch is released or until the
header reaches the ground.
82
9-11422
83
Automatic Reel Speed Control

If the combine is equipped with automatic reel speed control, the reel speed can be
set for a selected ratio with the ground speed. The ratio is adjustable from 1:1 to 2: 1 by
the reel speed ratio contro\. The automatic control is engaged and disengaged by
using the reel speed selector switch.
MANUAL OPERATION - To engage the manual mode, press on the rear half of the
reel speed selector switch. Turn the reel speed ratio control clockwise to increase reel
speed and counterclockwise to decrease reel speed. In this mode the reel speed will
not change automatically when the ground speed changes.
83
9-11422
84
AUTOMATIC OPERATION - To engage

the automatic mode, press on the front
half of the reel speed selector switch after
the feeder drive has been engaged. The
reel will operate at a minimum speed.
This minimum speed is adjustable from 0
to 40 RPM by turning the minimum reel
speed control. For average conditions
set the minimum reel speed at 6 to 10
RPM. When the combine is moving, turn
the reel speed ratio control to set the reel
speed. As the ground speed is increased
and decreased, the reel speed will
increase and decrease along with the
ground speed to keep the same speed
ratio.
The reel speed control must be

calibrated for the combine tire size and
the header type. Calibrate the control as
follows:
1. Remove the fuse panel cover.
2. Start the engine.
3. Set the reel speed ratio control to 1.
4. Turn the minimum reel speed control
fully counterclockwise.
5. Move the feeder switch to ON.
6. Drive the combine forward at
approximately 4 MPH (6 Km/h).
7. Turn the reel speed calibration control
with a small screwdriver until the lower
reel bat appears to remain stationary
with the ground.
8. Stop the combine, reset the minimum
reel speed control to your desired
position.
9. Install the fuse panel cover.
NOTE: The automatic reel speed control

will not have to be calibrated again until
the combine tire size or header type is
changed.
84
9-11422
Accumulator (If Equipped)
The accumulator has dry nitrogen gas on one side of a diaphram and hydraulic oil on
the other side. When hydraulic oil enters the accumulator, the diaphram is pushed
toward the nitrogen gas side. As the nitrogen gas is compressed, the accumulator
acts as a shock absorber between the combine and the header. Hydraulic oil enters
the accumulator when the header lift cylinders are extended to raise the header. The
accumulator will soften the up and down motion of the header when driving the
combine over rough ground or when transporting.
NOTE: Do not use the accumulator when operating a header with automatic header
height control.
A The accumulator contains a compressed gas. DO NOT drop the

accumulator or expose the accumulator to temperatures above
300°F (149°C). M183
85
9-11422
86
SHAFT SPEED MONITOR

Monitor Operation
When the key switch is turned to ON, all
nine indicator lamp panels will illuminate
and the audible alarm will sound for four
seconds. After four seconds the alarm
will shut off and the indicator lamp panels
will be dark. If all nine indicator lamp
panels did not illuminate check for the
cause and make corrections.
The shaft speed monitor checks the

speed of all nine shafts when both the se-
parator and the feeder switches are in the
ON position. The monitor will show which
shaft or shafts are turning slower than the
correct speed. More than one indicator
lamp can illuminate on and off at the
same time.
The alarm set point for the rotor and fan

must be adjusted anytime the rotor or fan
speed is changed. Adjust the alarm set
point as follows:
Turn the rotor and fan control knobs fully

counterclockwise. Start the engine. Turn
the separator and feeder switches on
and bring the engine up to full operating FAN ALARM CONTROL KNOB
speed.
Turn each control knob on the monitor

control panel clockwise until the indicator
lamp panel and the alarm comes on,
then slowly turn the control knob counter-
clockwise until the indicator lamp just
goes off.
These adjustments will set the speed at

which the alarm will come on and the in-
dicator lamp panel will illuminate for
either the rotor or the fan.
ROTOR ALARM CONTROL KNOB
The other seven shafts being monitored
have a fixed alarm set point and do not
require any adjustment.
86
9-11422
87
Ifthe alarm sounds and an indicator lamp

illuminates on and off when operating in
the field, the operator can turn the alarm
~
and indicator lamp off by pressing the • F' •
-
AlARM OFF touch switch. The indicator
lamp and alarm will stay off for that shaft
until either the key switch is turned off and
back on again or until the slow speed 176L7
shaft condition is corrected. When the
shaft is turning at the correct speed, the
indicator lamp will go off. If the shaft
slows down again, the alarm will sound
and the indicator lamp will illuminate on
and off.
While operating, a check can be made to see which shafts the ALARM OFF touch
switch has been used for. Press the ALARM OFF touch switch. All indicator lamps for
the shafts that were operating too slowly will illuminate. The indicator lamps will
illuminate for four seconds after the ALARM OFF touch switch is released.
Checking Monitor Operation

When one or more of the indicator lamps
show a slow speed condition when the r----,
combine is operating normally or the I fEIIIII 1\ IIGTIII iiI!
monitor does not operate correctly, ~
lIP - . MaNI'TaR AUllll
IIFF
check for the cause in the following
order:
175L7
87
9-11422
88
A. CHECK SEPARATOR SWITCH

OPERATION - The separator switch
must be in the ON position with the
engine running to energize the
monitor. With the engine running at
low idle, turn the separator switch off.
All power to the monitor must be off.
Turn the separator switch to ON and

keep the feeder switch OFF. The
indicator lamp for the feeder must not
illuminate.
B. CHECK SENSOR ADJUSTMENTS SENSOR

Check for damage to the shaft speed SWITCH
sensors and to the wiring harnesses.
Make repairs and replace parts as ne-
cessary.
Check the clearance between each

sensor switch assembly and the
magnet. The clearance must be 1/8
inch (3 mm) between the flat surface
of the magnet and the switch as- 1/8 INCH
(3 mm)
sembly. Make adjustments as neces- 178L7
sary.
C. CHECKING THE CONSOLE - If all nine indicator lamps and the alarm do not
operate correctly after the above checks, check to make sure that the harness is
connected to the rear of the console.
Start the engine, move the separator and the feeder switches to the ON position,
and run the engine at high idle. Slowly lower the engine speed to low idle and look
at the indicator light panels. As the speed of each shaft lowers below the alarm set
point, the indicator lamp must illuminate on and off and the audible alarm must
sound. If the console does not operate correctly, see your dealer.
88
9-11422
GRAIN SCAN MONITOR

Monitor Operation
1. Operate the combine in the field.
Adjust the combine for an acceptable
grain loss on the ground behind the
combine.
2. Set the sensor switch to BOTH.
3. Turn the grain selector control to the

:"'".:. ~~~~
middle point for the size of grain being
harvested.
EXAMPLE:
Corn and Beans ................ Large Dot SENSOR SWITCH
mal
Wheat and Barley .......... Medium Dot
Clover, Alfalfa or
Rapeseed ...................... Small Dot
NOTE: The moisture content of the

crop can require the sensitivity setting
to be increased (clockwise) or de-
creased (counterclockwise).
4. Operate the combine in the field under

normal speed and load for the crop.
5. As the combine is operating, turn the GRAIN SELECTOR CONTROL

meter position control until the meter
needle is in the middle of the green
scale.
METER POSITION CONTROL
89
9-11422
90
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
6. Stop the combine and check the ground behind the combine. If the grain loss on
the ground is acceptable. the grain loss monitor is adjusted correctly for the crop
and conditions. If the grain loss is not acceptable. repeat steps 1 through 6 until an
acceptable grain loss is found.
When the grain loss monitor has been adjusted correctly. the operator can check
the meter during the harvesting operation and make ground speed corrections as
follows:
Meter Pointer
Moves Up ............................................................... Use Slower Ground Speed
Meter Pointer
Moves Down ............................................................ Use Faster Ground Speed
NOTE: Under normal operation, the meter needle can move up the scale for a short
time before returning to the middle position. A correction in ground speed does not
have to be made unless the meter needle stays in the up scale position. If this needle
deflection occurs frequently, check the grain loss behind the combine, the combine,
and the monitor for possible problems.
90
9-11422
OPERAnNG INSTRUCTIONS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 91
Comparing Rotor/Chaffer Loss
To compare the rotor loss to the chaffer loss during the harvesting operation, turn the
selector switch to ROTOR and to CHAFFER. Look at the meter needle deflection for
each position. If the rotor position indicates an increase in grain loss, the cause can
be improper threshing. If the chaffer position indicates an increase in grain loss, the
air flow or the sieves are not adjusted correctly.
NOTE: Variation in ground and crop conditions can affect loses in both the rotor and
the chaffer.
NOTE: If the chaffer sensor brackets fill with straw and chaff during combine
operation, remove the sensor seed combs.
Checking Monitor Operation

1. Turn the sensor switch to OFF.
2. Turn the key switch to ON, but do not

start the engine.
3. Turn the sensor switch to CHAFFER.

All four sensor indicator panels will
illuminate for approximately one
second. and the meter needle will
raise to the RH side of the scale and
them drop back to the LH side. This
sequence occurs as an indication that
the monitor console is operating
correctly. If this sequence does not
occur, see your dealer.
91
9-11422
92 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Checking Sensor Operation

1. Turn the grain selector control fully
clockwise.
2. Turn the sensor switch to chaffer.
3. Have another person lightly hit the

chaffer sensor sounding board with a
pencil. The indicator lamp for that
sensor must illuminate each time the
sensor sounding board is hit. Check
both chaffer sensors.
92
9-11422
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the rotor

cage sensors and with the sensor
switch turned to BOTH. If an indicator
lamp does not light, the sensor needs
replacing or the wiring harness needs
repair.
5. Have another person rapidly hit one of the sensors. Look at the meter on the
monitor console. The meter needle must move to the right. Repeat this test for all
four grain sensors. If the indicator lamps illuminate but the meter needle does not
move to the right, the monitor console needs repair. See your dealer.
6. If the operation in Step 5 is correct, check the operation of the digital tachometer.
The grain loss monitor is connected to the ground speed sensor. If the digital
tachometer does not operate correctly, the ground speed sensor or the harness
needs repair.
93
9-11422
94
FEEDER OPERATION
Reversing the Feeder
The feeder conveyor can be manually moved in a reverse direction to clear
obstructions. To reverse the feeder conveyor. proceed as follows:
1. Move the feeder clutch switch and the separator drive switch to the OFF position.
2. Lower the header to the ground. engage the parking brake and stop the engine.
Remove the key from the key switch.
h Before leaving the machine. lower attachments. place all controls in

~ neutral. and set the parking brake. stop the engine. and remove the
key from the ignition switch. ' M224f1
3. Open the cover panel on the feeder drive belt shield.

4. Put the socket of the rotor rocking wrench over the end of the feeder pivot shaft.
5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise to move the feeder conveyor in the reverse
direction.
6. When the feeder is clear. remove the wrench and close the cover panel.
7. Put the rotor rocking wrench in the storage position on the LH side of the separator.
S. Remove any obstruction from the feeder or header.
94
9-11422
Feeder Reverser (If Equipped)

If the combine is equipped with the feeder reverser, the operator can move the feeder
conveyor in a reverse direction from inside the cab. The feeder reverser operates as
follows:
1. Lift and pull the feeder clutch switch
rearward to the REVERSE position
and press the reverse button to
engage the feeder reverser motor. Do
not press the reverse button for more
than 5 seconds if the motor will not
turn the feeder conveyor.
2. When the feeder or header is clear of

material, release the reverse button
and the feeder clutch switch. Move
the separator drive switch to OFF
position.
3. Stop the combine, engage the parking brake and lower the header to the ground.
Remove any obstructions from the feeder or header.
Rock Trap (If Equipped)

The rock trap uses a beater with three
blades. Each blade has an adjustable
blade extension. As the beater turns, the
blades and extensions drive the rocks
into the trap, forcing out any material that
has filled the trap. Empty the rock trap
once a day. When threshing in areas with
a large quantity of rocks, empty the rock
trap more frequently.
IMPORTANT: If the rock trap is allowed to fill with rocks, other rocks will pass into the
combine resulting in possible damage to the rock trap and/or the combine.
95
9-11422
96
Emptying the Rock Trap

To empty the rock trap:
1. Lower the header to the ground. set
the parking brake and stop the
engine.
2. Release the header safety lock from
the storage position.
3. Rotate the rock trap door latch
forward past the partially lowered
safety lock. Let the rock trap door
rotate down and empty the rock trap.
4. Close the rock trap door and rotate
the door latch rearward to lock the
door in the closed position.
5. Raise the header safety lock to the
storage position.
Operating
Recommendations
1. The blade extensions have slotted
holes for adjustment. Operate with
blade extensions out for the best rock
protection. Operate with the blade
extensions in for increased feeding
capacity.
96
9-11422
2. Operate with the finger grate installed in short green crop conditions to get a
smooth flow of material from feeder to rotor. Remove the finger grate for better rock
protection.
3. Operate with serrated blade extensions in conditions where bunchy feeding

occurs or when a short crop does not feed evenly under the beater. See your
Dealer for the serrated blade extensions.
4. Two sprockets provided for beater shaft:

20T for 800 RPM - provides maximum rock protection.
32T for 500 RPM - used generally for best overall performance and to prevent
wrapping green, weedy crops.
97
9-11422
98
Feeder Adjustment for Tire Size

Your combine was adjusted for the feeder length and tire size combination at the
factory. If the tire size is changed, the feeder adapter must be adjusted.
To adjust the feeder adapter to the tire

size do the following:
1. Remove the header from the feeder.
2. Loosen the mounting bolts for the
feeder adapter. There are 4 bolts on
each side.
3. Adjust the draw bolts to the length
shown in the chart and tighten the lock
nut.
4. Tighten the mounting bolts to a torque
of 90 Ib ft (122 Nm).
NOTE: After adjusting the feeder adapt-

er, check the clearance between the
conveyor chain slats and the face of the
feeder adapter. See Conveyor Drum
Fore/Aft Adjustment.
IMPORTANT: Each time the feeder adapter is adjusted, check the torque on the
mounting bolts after the first 50 hours of operation.
149L8
98
9-11422
Feeder Adjustment with Rock Trap
TIRE LOW CLEARANCE HIGH CLEARANCE

SIZE A B A B
FEEDER DRAW BOLT FEEDER DRAW BOLT
LENGTH LENGTH LENGTH LENGTH
23.1-26 R1 47 inch 9-5/16 inch (236 mm) 47 inch 7-9/16 inch (192 mm)
28L-26 R1 47 inch 9-5/16 inch (236 mm) 47 inch 7-9/16 inch (192 mm)
28L-26 R2 47 inch 9-5116 inch (236 mm) 47 inch 5-7/8 inch (150 mm)
28L-26 R2 - - - 54.5 inch 9-5/16 inch (236 mm)
18.4-38 R1 54.5 inch 9-5/16 inch (236 mm) 54.5 inch 7-9/16 inch (192 mm)
24.5-32 R1 47 inch 7-9116 inch (192 mm) 47 inch 4-1/8 inch (105 mm)
30.5L-32 R1 47 inch 5-7/8 inch (150 mm) 47 inch 4-1/8 inch (105 mm)
30.5L-32 R1 54.5 inch 9-5/16 inch (236 mm) 54.5 inch 7-9/16 inch (192 mm)
67 x 34-30 47 inch 7-9/16 inch (192 mm) 47 inch 5-7/8 inch (150 mm)
67 x 34-30 54.5 inch 9-5/16 inch (236 mm) 54.5 inch 9-5/16 inch (236 mm)
99
9-11422
100
Feeder Adjustment without Rock Trap
TIRE LOW CLEARANCE HIGH CLEARANCE

SIZE A B A B
FEEDER DRAW BOLT FEEDER DRAW BOLT
LENGTH LENGTH LENGTH LENGTH
28L-26 R1 47 inch 9-5116 inch (236 mm) 47 inch 5-7/8 inch (150 mm)
28L-26 R2 47 inch 9-5/16 inch (236 mm) 54.5 inch 9-5/16 inch (236 mm)
30.5L-32 R1 54.5 inch 9-5116 inch (236 mm) 54.5 inch 7-9/16 inch (192 mm)
67 x 34-30 54.5 inch 9-5/16 inch (236 mm) 54.5 inch 7-9/16 inch (192 mm)
TRACK 54.5 inch 5-7/8 inch (150 mm) 54.5 inch 4-1/8 inch (105 mm)
100
9-11422
UNLOADER OPERATION
The unloader tube operation is controlled

from cab. The grain tank un loader tube
switch is located on the steering column.
Use this switch to move the unloader
tube into the unload position. The grain
tank un loader drive lever is located on the
left hand side of the operators seat. Use
this lever to engage and disengage the
unloader drive.
During transport the unloader tube is

held to the transport bracket with a
retaining clip. Make sure the retaining
clip is removed before operating the
controls for the unloader tube.
NOTE: Umit switches will close the hydraulic control valve if the unloader tube switch
is left in either the SWING OUT or the SWING IN position.
A DO NOT enter the grain tank when the combine is running. The
rotating augers in the bottom of the grain tank can cause severe
injury including possible loss of limbs. M192
101
9-11422
102
OPERATORS PLATFORM AND LADDER

Platform Extensions for Stationary Ladder
The table below shows the platform extensions required with the stationary ladder to
provide the correct tire clearance at different wheel treads.
OPERATORS PLATFORM EXTENSION SIZE
DRIVE DRIVE WHEEL TREAD

TIRE 100 INCH 106 INCH 108 INCH 110 INCH 112 INCH 120 INCH
SIZE (2540 mm) (2692 mm) (2743 mm) (2794 mm) (2845 mm) (3048 mm)
23.1-26 NOT 3.5 INCH 3.5 INCH 3.5 INCH 7 INCH 10.5 INCH
REQUIRED (89mm) (89 mm) (89mm) (178 mm) (267 mm)
28L-26 3.5 INCH 3.5 INCH 7 INCH 7 INCH 7 INCH 10.5 INCH
(89 mm) (89 mm) (178 mm) (178 mm) (178 mm) (267 mm)
24.5-32 3.5 INCH 3.5 INCH 7 INCH 7 INCH 7 INCH 10.5 INCH
(89 mm) (89 mm) (178 mm) (178 mm) (178 mm) (267 mm)
30.5L-32 3.5 INCH 7 INCH 7 INCH 7 INCH 10.5 INCH 14 INCH

(89 mm) (267 mm) (178 mm) (178 mm) (267 mm) (356 mm)
67 X 34-30 NOT NOT 10.5 INCH 10.5 INCH 10.5 INCH 14 INCH
APPLICABLE APPLICABLE (267 mm) (267 mm) (267 mm) (356 mm)
SHOE WIDTH EXTENSION SIZE

20 INCH 10.5 INCH
(508 mm) (267 mm)
127 INCH 24 INCH 10.5 INCH

(3226 mm) (610 mm) (267 mm)
TRACK
32 INCH 14 INCH
TREAD (813 mm) (356 mm)
36 INCH 17.5 INCH

(915 mm) (445 mm)
NOTE: Handrail extensions are required with 10.5 inch (267 mm), 14 inch (356 mm)
and 17.5 inch (445 mm) platform extensions. See your Dealer.
102
9-11422
Stationary Ladder Positions

The stationary ladder has three mounting positions that can be used to shorten or
lengthen the ladder as required for various tire sizes. The short (A) or intermediate (8)
position is required for all tire sizes available on this combine.
Install the ladder, upper support, side supports and hand rails in the short (A) or inter-
mediate (8) position as shown.
The table below shows the operators ladder positions needed with different drive
wheels. Adjust the stationary operators ladder to the position as required.
UPPER
SUPPORT
479L7 480L7
A POSITION B POSITION
LOW HIGH
TIRE SIZE CLEARANCE CLEARANCE
23.1-26 A A
28L-25 A A
23.1-34 A 8
24.5-32 8 8
30.5L-32 8 8
57 X 34-30 A 8
103
9-11422
104
Pivoting Ladder Attachment

The pivoting ladder attachment is required for the applications listed below:
A. Four row corn head with 36 inch (914 mm) spacing.
B. Four row corn head with 38 inch (965 mm) spacing and 120 inch (3048 mm) or
larger wheel tread.
C. Five row narrow corn head.
D. 15 foot (4.57 m) or larger headers when drive axle extensions are used.
The pivoting ladder attachment can be used for crop conditions and axle treads dif-
ferent from those shown.
NOTE: The pivoting ladder attachment will give 3.5 inch (89 mm) of operators plat-
form extension.
OPERATOR PLATFORM EXTENSION SIZE
DRIVE DRIVE WHEEL TREAD

TIRE 100 INCH 106 INCH 108 INCH 112 INCH 120 INCH 122 INCH
SIZE (2540 mm) (2692 mm) (2743 mm) (2845 mm) (3048 m) (3099 mm)
3.5 INCH 3.5 INCH 7 INCH 7 INCH 10.5 INCH 14 INCH

23.1-26 (89 mm) (89 mm) (178 mm) (178 m) (267 mm) (356 mm)
3.5 INCH 7 INCH 7 INCH 10.5 INCH 14 INCH 14 INCH
28L-26 (89 mm) (178 mm) (178 mm) (267 mm) (356 mm) (356 mm)
3.5INCH 7 INCH 7 INCH 10.5INCH** 14 INCH 14 INCH

24.5-32 (89 mm) (178 mm) (178 mm) (267 mm) (356 mm) (356 mm)
7INCH* 7 INCH 10.5 INCH 10.5 INCH 14 INCH 17.5 INCH
30.5L-32 (178 mm) (178 mm) (267 mm) (267 mm) (356 mm) (445 mm)
NOT NOT 10.5 INCH 14INCH*** 17.5 INCH 17.5 INCH
67 X 34-30 APPUCABLE APPUCABLE (267 mm) (356 mm) (445 mm) (445 mm)
NOTE: Hand rail extensions are required with 10.5 inch (267 mm), 14 inch (356 mm)
and 17.5 inch (445 mm) platform extensions.
*Use 3.5 inch (89 mm) for 98 inch (2489 mm) tread.
**Use 7 inch (178 mm) for 110 inch (2749 mm) tread.
***Use 10.5 inch (267 mm) for 110 inch (2749 mm) tread.
104
9-11422
105
Pivoting Ladder Positions

The pivoting ladder has three mounting positions that can be used to shorten or
lengthen the ladder as required for various tire sizes. The short (A) or intermediate (8)
position is required for all tire sizes available on this combine.
Install the ladder, upper support, side supports and hand rails in the short (A) or inter-
mediate (8) position as shown.
The table below shows the operators ladder positions needed with different drive
wheels. Adjust the pivoting operators ladder to the position as required.
LADDER
\ SIDE
SUPPORT
SIDE
SUPPORT
o 01\
o UPPER SUPPORT
342L7 343L7
A POSITION 8 POSITION
LOW HIGH
TIRE SIZE CLEARANCE CLEARANCE
23.1-26 A A
28L-26 A A
23.1-34 A B
24.5-32 B B
30.5L-32 B B
67 X 34-30 A B
105
9-11422
106
AMBER WARNING LAMPS

DIRECTION TURN SIGNAL
SMV SYMBOL
Collision of high speed road traffic and slow moving machines can
h cause personal injury or death. On roads, use flasher/lights ac-
. . cording to local laws. Keep SMV emblem visible. Pull over to let
faster traffic pass. Slow down and signal before turning off. M110D
Your combine has flashing warning lamps, direction turn signals, tail lamps and a
slow moving vehicle (SMV) emblem. Make sure to use these items correctly, when
operating the combine on the road, for the safety and protection of the operator and
other vehicle operators. The flashing amber warning lamps must be operating when
the combine is operated on a road during the day or night. A vehicle operator that
comes near the combine must see the SMV emblem and the tail lamps from the rear
and the flashing amber warning lamps from the front and rear.
The SMV emblem must be replaced when the bright orange, center triangle has noti-
ceably faded to a pale orange color. This fading of the orange fluorescent center will
occur due to long exposure to sunlight, and reduces daytime identification by ap-
proaching vehicle drivers.
106
9-11422
FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 107
SECTION INDEX
Accumlator Pressure Crop Settings, Initial (Continued)
Adjustment ................................ 136-137 Standard Rotor
Brome Grass ............................. 121
Auger Clover, White ............................. 121
Adjustment... ................................. 130 Corn .......................................... 110
Bed ............................................... 160 Edible Beans ............................. 120
Clean Out Door ............................ 160 Flax ............................................ 121
Distribution Paddles ..................... 160 Grasses ..................................... 121
Lintel Beans .............................. 122
Bars Maize ......................................... 112
Filler .............................................. 153 Milo ........................................... 112
Interrupter ..................................... 153 Mustard ..................................... 122
Rasp ............................................. 147 Oats .......................................... 122
Separator ...................................... 147 Pinto Beans ............................... 122
Popcorn ..................................... 110
Cage Transport Vanes .............. 145-146 Rape .......................................... 122
Rice ........................................... 115
Chaffer Sieves ........................... 162-165 Rye ............................................ 123
Adjustment... ................................. 165 Rye Grass ................................. 119
Grain Pan Dividers ....................... 165 Safflower ................................... 123
Installation ..................................... 164 Soybeans .................................. 116
Removal ........................................ 163 Sunflower .................................. 113
Types ............................................ 162 Wheat. ....................................... 111
White Clover. ............................. 121
Cleaning Fan .................................... 161 Wild Rice ................................... 117
Air Inlet Shields ............................. 161
Slow Speed .................................. 161 Cutting and Feeding ................. 127-137
Speed Adjustment... ..................... 161
Discharge Beater ............................. 176
Bottom Adjustment... .................... 176
Concave .................................... 149-153
Filler Bars ...................................... 153 Elevators ........................................... 172
Interrupter Bars ............................. 153 Clean Out Doors ........................... 172
Position Adjustment... ............ 150-151 Perforated Screens ....................... 172
Setting ........................................... 149 Steel Flights .................................. 172
Wire Sizes ..................................... 152
Feeder Conveyer ....................... 132-135
Crop Settings, Initial Accumulator Pressure
Specialty Rotor ............................. 124 Adjustment... .......................... 136-137
Standard Rotor ...................... 11 0-123 Chain Adjustment ......................... 132
Alfalfa ........................................ 118 Drum Fore/Aft Adjustment... ......... 134
Barley ........................................ 114 Drum Lower Stop Adjustment ...... 133
Bent Grass ................................ 121 Header Rate of Lower
Black Eye Peas ......................... 122 Adjustment. ................................... 137
Blue Grass ................................ 121 Stone Retard Adjustment.. ........... 135
107
9-11422
108
FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
SECTION INDEX
Grain Cleaning .......................... 156-169 Seed Loss ................................. 182-186
Quick Kill ....................................... 158 Corn Loss Table ........................... 186
Troubleshooting ............................ 157 Header Losses ............................. 183
Pre Harvest Loss .......................... 182
Grain Handling and Material Seed Loss ..................................... 185
Distribution ................................ 170-186 Separator Loss ............................. 183
Grain Tank and Unloader ......... 173-175 Shear Bolt

Clean Out Door ............................ 174 Unloader Drive .............................. 175
Leveling Auger Adjustment .......... 173
Long Unloader Tube .................... 174 Shoe Sieves .............................. 166-169
Perforated Unloader Tube ............ 174 Adjustments .................................. 169
Unloader Auger Cover Alfalfa Package ............................. 166
Adjustment.. .................................. 173 Installation ..................................... 168
Unloader Drive Shear Bolt.. .......... 175 Removal ........................................ 167
Types ............................................ 166
Grates ........................................154-155
Slotted ........................................... 154 Side Hill Dividers .............................. 165
Solid .............................................. 155
Square Bar .................................... 154 Sieves, Chaffer ................................. 162
Header Sieves, Shoe .................................... 166

Leveling ......................................... 131
Losses .......................................... 183 Specialty Rotor, Crop Settings ......... 124
Loss Tables ............................... 185-186 Stone Retarder ................................. 135

Corn .............................................. 186
Seed ............................................. 185 Straw Chopper .......................... 179-181
Chop and Spread ......................... 181
Pre Harvest Loss .............................. 182 Corn .......................................... 181
Straw ......................................... 181
Reel Concave Adjustment .................... 180
Bat ................................................ 128 Speed Adjustment.. ...................... 179
Pickup ........................................... 128
Straw Spreader ......................... 177-178
Bat Adjustment ............................. 178
Rotor .......................................... 143-148
Cone Removal .............................. 177
Cage Transport Vanes .......... 145-146
Hoop Deflector Shields ................ 178
Clearing ........................................ 144
Custom Cutter Package ............... 147 Threshing and Separating ......... 138-155
Rasp and Separator Bars ............ 147
Specialty Crop Assembly ............. 148 Unloader Tube ................................. 174
Speed Setting ............................... 143 Long .............................................. 174
Two Speed Gear Case ................. 143 Perforated ..................................... 174
108
9-11422
insert llx17 pg.l09-110
9-11422
111
FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Wheat
Initial Crop Settings (Standard Rotor)
Rotor Speed 900
Concave Type Small Wire
Concave Setting No.2
Chaffer Setting 5/8 inch
Shoe Setting 3/8 inch
Fan Speed 850
Grate Type Slotted Grate
To correct the specific harvesting problems listed in the left hand column below,
follow and complete only the adjustments described at the top of each column which
has a number. The number indicates the sequence in which each adjustment should
be made. If a symbol or letter appears with a number, this indicates the type of ad-
justment action to be performed. See key for symbol or letter identification.
ADJUSTMENT
0
w en
w w 0
w e... w Z w
~ en :; en w a:
w ~
oC!) a: ~ w e...
en u. w
w
0
zz 0 w a: u. Z
~a: z « z w
o- 0 ~ ~ «zu. ::I:
0
::I: « w
e...
og 0 0 w 0 en ::I: en
0
03
we... ~ I-
en ~ ~ l-
en
I-
en
I-
en w ...J
w
e...a: ::> ...,
::> ...,
::> 0
z ...,
::> ::> ...,
::>
~ ~
HARVEST CONDITION eno
~u.
a« 0
«
0
« 0
0 «0
a« 0
«
a:
C!) a:
I-
Clean Grain Sample

Damaged Grain 3 1/* 4/0 2/0
Heavy Stems 3/. 2/C 1/C
Unthreshed Heads 1 I. 2/C 3/C
Rnes 4/* 5/0 1 I. 3/C 2/C
Rotor Losses 1 2/* 3/C 4/R
Excessive Power Consumption 1 I. 2/0 3/F 4
Grain Blowing Over Chaffer 1/* 2/0 3

Grain Loss Over Chaffer 3/* 1 I. 2/0 4/A 5
Shoe Sieve Overloading 4/* 3/. 1/C 2/0 5
KEY: 0= Open A = Add R = Remove! • = Increase
C = Close F = Forward Rearward * = Decrease
IMPORTANT: The single most common misadjustment is setting rotor speed too
slow. High moisture crops will require higher rotor speeds.
111
9-11422
112
FIELD OPERATlON _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Maize/Milo
Rotor Speed 600
Concave Type Large Wire
Concave Setting 3
Shoe Setting 318 inch
Fan Speed 900 RPM
Grate Type Bar grates with
notched separator bars
ADJUSTMENT
0
w
w
en
w
w 0..
0
Z
~ en W
en
W
w 0:: ~
UC) 0:: ~ ~ W 0.. w w
zz u 0:: en U.
u. w Z 0
0- ~
W
«z
z « w
§ z 0
ug 00:: 0
U 5 W ~
:J:
U
:J:
en :J:
U
w
0..
en
03 ~Z :J..,
l- I- I- l- I- t) ...J
wo.. en en en en en w w
..,
:J :J ..,
:J ..,
:J ..,
:J !C( ~
HARVEST CONDITION
0..0::
eno
~u.
0
«
a
« 0
« u0 0
« ~ ~
0::
C) 0::
I-
Clean Milo/Maize Sample

Damaged Grain 1 2/* 4/0 3/0
Heavy Stems 3/* 4/0 2/C 1/C
Fines/Trash 2/* 3/0 1/.
Rotor Losses 1 4/. 2/C SIR 3/0
Unthreshed Heads 2/. 1/C
Excessive Power Consumption 1/. 2/0 3/F 4/*
Grain Loss Over Chaffer 3/* 1/. 2/0 4
Maize/Milo Blowing Over Chaffer 1/* 2/0

KEY: 0= Open A = Add R = Removel • = Increase
112
9-11422
FIELD OPERATlON _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 113
Sunflowers
Rotor Speed 350
Concave Type Small Wire 1 Large Wire 2 &3
Concave Setting 5
Fan Speed 700 RPM
Grate Type 1st Slotted.
2nd & 3rd Covered (Solid)
To correct the specific harvesting problems listed in the left hand column below.
be made. If a symbol or letter appears with a number. this indicates the type of ad-
ADJUSTMENT
0
w
w
en
w
w c.. 0
en w Z w a: ~
~
u(!) a: ~ ~ en
w
w
c.. w
u. w
U w a: en u. w Z 0
~
ZZ Z « 0 Z w
0-
ug a:
~::::l
u"'" en~
0
u
~
5
~
§
w
~
Z
~
~
en
I
u
~
en
I
en
~
en
«
I
u
w
w
c..
en
.....
wc.. en en U w
c..a: .~ ::::l ::::l ....,
::::l ....,
::::l ::::l
~ ~
HARVEST CONDITION eno
~u..
0
« a a
« «
Z
0
u 0
«
0
«
a
«
a:
(!) a:
~
Clean Sunflower Sample

Damaged Grain 4/* 1/0 3/C 2/0
Excessive Stems/Trash 5/* 4/0 3/. 2/C 1/C
Rotor Losses 1 4/. 2/C 3/0
Unthreshed Heads 1 21. 1/C
Excessive Power Consumption 1 I. 2/0
Grain Loss Over Chaffer 5/* 4/0 79 3/* 1 I. 2/0 61 **
Grain Blowing OVer Chaffer 1/* 2/0
Shoe Sieve OVerloading 3/* 2/C 1/0 41 **
* Change the concave configuration to more small wire concaves.
** Use solid grates.
113
9-11422
114 FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Barley
Rotor Speed 850
Concave Type Small Wire 1 Large Wire 2 & 3
Concave Setting Easy Thresh
Fan Speed 750 RPM
Grate Type 1 Slotted and 2 Bar
ADJUSTMENT
0
w m
w w w 0
e... w Z w
~ m w a: ~
oC!) a: ~ ~ m
w e... w
u.. w
0
ZZ 0 0 w a: m u.. w Z
w
0- Z § «::r:: 0 Z
t)
og a: 0 ~ w
Z
«u.. ::r::
m
«
::r::
w
e...
0 0 0
0 m
t;3
we... t;)
.,
~
t;)
.,
~
t;)
~
~Z l-
m
~
t;)
~
t;)
.,
~
W
~
...J
w
e...a: ~
~
mo 0 (3 0 (3 0 a: a:
HARVEST CONDITION ~u.. « ~ « 0 « « C!) I-
Clean Barley Sample

Damaged Grain 2/* 3/0 4/C 1/0
Excessive Stems/Trash 4/* 2/. 3/C 1/C 5/**
Rotor Losses 1 2/C 4/R 3/0
Unthreshed Heads 2/. 1/C
Excessive Power Consumption 1/.
Grain Loss Over Chaffer 2/* 1/0 3/0
Grain Blowing Over Chaffer 1/* 2/0
Shoe Sieve Overloading 3/. 2/C 1/0
KEY: 0 = Open A = Add R = Remove! • = Increase
C = Close F = Forward Rearward *
= Decrease
* Increase fan speed when sample caught at end of chaffer. Decrease fan speed when sample caught 2 to
3 feet from end of chaffer.
** Cover Slot.
114
9-11422
FIELD OPERATION_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 115
Rice
Initial Crop Settings
Rotor Speed 900
Concave Setting Hard Thresh
(Std. Rice Rotor) **
Fan Speed 750 RPM
Grate Type Bar Grate
ADJUSTMENT
0
w m
w w 0
W Il. Z w
m W a: ~
~
UC) a: ~ ~ m
w
w
Il. w
U.
w
u w a: m u. w Z 0
zZ
~ z § « 0 z w
0-
ug
I--:::J
u..J
0
a:
0
U 5
I--
w
~
z
~
I--
:c
U
:c
m
I--
«
:c
U
w
Il.
m
..J
wll.
I--
m ~ m U m ~ m W w
Il.a: :::J :::J
-, :::J Z :::J :::J
-, :::J
-, !;;( ~
HARVEST CONDITION mo
~u.
d
« «0 d
«
0
u d
« «0
0
«
a:
C) a:
I--
Clean Rice Sample

Damage Rice/Hulling 3 1/* 4/0 5/R 2/0
Poor Material Flow 1 tr 2/C 31M 4/R
Unthreshed Heads 1 tr 2/0 3/C
Excessive Power Consumption 1 tr 2/0 3/F 4/*
Grain Loss Over Chaffer 3/* 1/. 2/0 4

Shoe Sieve Overloading 4/* 3/. 1/C 2/0
KEY: 0= Open A = Add R = Remove! • = Increase M = Middle
* Add spiked rasp bars over concave area to improve material and reduce rotor losses.
** Set concave indicator at No. 4 for rice rotors with spiked rasp bars over concave area.
115
9-11422
116
FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Soybeans
Rotor Speed * 500 to 700
Concave Setting 4
Fan Speed 900 RPM
Grate Type BarlSlotted Grate
ADJUSTMENT
0
w en
w w w 0
e.. w Z w
~ en :;: en w a:: ~
UG a:: ~ w e..
en
w
IL
w
Z 0
zz 0 U w a:: IL w w
z § <C 0 Z
ug
0-
b
a:: u
0
5 w
Z
~
:x:
U
:x:
en
<C
:x:
U
W
e..
en
t33
we.. ~
....,
::l
~
::l
I-
en
....,
::l ~
z
l-
en
....,
::l
I-
en
....,
::l
~
....,
::l
w
~
-I
w
e..a:
eno a 0 a:: ~
HARVEST CONDITION ~IL
0 0 0 0 0 a::
<C <C <C U <C <C <C G I-
Clean Bean Sample

Damaged Grain 3 11* 4/0 5/R 2/0
Heavy Stems 4/* 5/0 3/. 2/C 1/C
Unthreshed Pods 1/. 2/C 3/C
Trash 4/* 5/0 1/. 3/C 2/C
Rotor Losses 1 2/* 3/C 4/R 5/R
Excessive Power Consumption 1/. 2/0 3/F 4/R 5
Bean Loss Over Chaffer 3/* 4 1 2/0 5

* Some soybean varieties may require rotor speeds up to 700 RPM or more.
116
9-11422
FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 117
Wild Rice
Initial Crop Settings (Standard Rice Rotor)
Rotor Speed 800
Concave Type Large Wire **
Concave Setting 1
Fan Speed 780 RPM
Grate Type Bar Grate
ADJUSTMENT
0 .
UJ
UJ
UJ
Il.
CJ)
UJ
Z
.. 0 (.?
> CJ) UJ
:;c ~ CJ)
UJ
UJ
a:
UJ
....J
UJ
C)(!) a: UJ Il. LL. Z
ZZ 0 U UJ a: CJ) LL. UJ 0
Z -< z w
0- I--
0
(!)
-< ~ Z 0 -< w
ug 0
a: U U w ~
I
U
I
CJ) I Il.
00
U
I--:J
u....J I--
00 t; I--
00
:;c I--
00
I--
00
I--
00 UJ ....J
w
wll. U
Il.a: :J
J
:J
J
:J
J Z :J
J
:J
J
:J
J ~ :;c
000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a: a:
HARVEST CONDITION ~LL. -< -< -< u -< -< -< (!) I--
Clean Rice Sample

Damaged RicelHulling 3 1/* 4/0 SIR 2/0
***
Poor Material Flow 1 I. 2/C 31M 4/R
***
Unthreshed Heads 1 I. 2/0 3/C
***
Excessive Power Consumption 1 I. 2/F 3
Grain Loss Over Chaffer 3/* 1 I. 2/0 4

Shoe Sieve Overloading 4/* 3~ 1 I C 2/0
KEY: 0= Open A = Add R = Removel • = Increase M = Middle
* Set directional vanes over concaves in middle position.
Set directional vanes over separator grates in forward position.
** Remove every other concave wire (or more) for wild rice harvesting.
*** Add spiked rasp bars over concave area to improve material flow and reduce rotor losses.
117
9-11422
118
FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Alfalfa
Rotor Speed 850
Concave Setting Hard Thresh
Chaffer Setting * 3/8 inch
Shoe Setting ** Closed/Round Hole
Fan Speed 450 RPM
Grate Type Slotted
ADJUSTMENT
0
w rn
w w 0 ..c:
w
~
e..
rn
c:
w
~
Z
;;; rn
w
w
w
e.. w
u.
... ~
w
oC)
zz 0 0 w c: rn u. w z 0
0- z z <: 0 z w
08 0c: 0 ~ §
w <:
u.
:c :c
rn
<:
:c
w
e..
0 0 0 0 rn
t;3
we.. t; t; t; ~ l-
rn
I-
rn t; w ...J
w
0 ::::> ::::> ::::>
e..c: ::::> ::::>
...., ::::>
...., z ...., ...., !;: ~
HARVEST CONDITION rno
~u.
a
<:
0
<:
0
<:
0
0
0
<:
a
<:
0
<:
c:
C)
c:
I-
Clean Seed Sample

Heavy Stems 3/* 4/0 2/C 1/C
Unthreshed Curels 1 I. 2/C C
Excessive Stemsffrash 3/* 4/0 2/C 1/C
Rotor Losses 1 2/* 3/C 4/R 5/*
Excessive Power Consumption 1 I. 2/0 3/F 4/*
Seed Loss Over Chaffer 1/* 2/0 3
Seed Blowing Over Chaffer 3/* 2/. 1/0 4/. 51.
Shoe Sieve Overloading 4/* 3/. 1/C 2/0 5/*
* Peterson sieve can be ordered from Service Parts.
** The standard grain sieve can be used in the closed position, or a round hole sieve can be used. The
combine can be equipped with an alfalfa package for the shoe sieve.
118
9-11422
FIELD OPERATION,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 119
Rye Grass
Rotor Speed 750
Concave Setting 4or5
Fan Speed 450 RPM
Grate Type Slotted
ADJUSTMENT
cw
CIJ
w w C
W Q. Z
>- CIJ
W W
w a: ~
~
5(!)
ZZ
a:
0 5 w
CIJ
w
a:
Q.
CIJ
w
u.
u.
«~
w
w
Z C
w
o- Z § 0 «Z~
ug
t;3
0a: 0
u 5 w
:.;c
Z
Lt u ~
CIJ
u
w
Q.
CIJ
~ ~ ~ ~
I-
wQ. CIJ ~ W
-I
W
Q.a: ..,::::l ..,
::::l ::::l U
Z
::::l ..,
::::l ..,::::l !;( :.;c
HARVEST CONDITION ClJo
~u.
c
«
c
« a
«
0
u ~ c
« «c
a:
(!)
a:
I-
Clean Rye Grass Sample

Heavy Stems 4/* 5/0 3/. 2/C 1/C
Unthreshed Heads 1 I. 2/C 3/C
Excessive Stems/Trash 4/* 5/0 1 I. 3/C 2/C
Rotor Losses 1 2/* 3/C 4/R 5/*
Excessive Power Consumption 1 I. 2/0 3/F 4
Grain Loss Over Chaffer 1/* 2/0 3
Rye Grass Blowing Over Chaffer 3/* 1 I. 2/0 4/. 5

119
9-11422
120 FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Edible Beans
Rotor Speed 300 - 600
Concave Setting 3 to 5
Fan Speed 900 RPM
Grate Type Slotted
ADJUSTMENT
0
w rn
w w 0
W Q. Z W rn
rn W a:
~ ~ rn w ..J
UC!)
zz
a:
0 5z w
w
a:
Q.
rn
w
u.
u.
«
w
W
Z
z
0
w
«z
§ 0
0-
ug 0a: 0 ~ :J:
u :J: «:J: w
Q.
u u w u. rn rn
u~
U
b3
wQ. ~ I-
rn ~
l-
rn
I-
rn
I-
rn w ..J
w
::::> ::::> ::::> z ::::> ::::> ::::> ~
Q.a: ~
HARVEST CONDITION rno
~u.
i3
« a« ~
«0
0
u «
i3 ~
~
«0
a:
C!)
a:
I-
Clean Grain Sample

Damaged Grain 7 2/* 3/0 5/FP 6/R 4/C 1/0
Excessive Stems/Trash 4/* 2/. 3/C 1/C 5/CS
Rotor Losses 1 4/** 2/0 3/0P*
Unthreshed Heads 21. 1/C
Excessive Power Consumption 1/. 2/FP
** **
Grain Loss Over Chaffer ** 3/0 1 I . 2/0 4/CS
Grain Blowing Over Chaffer 1/* 2/0
Shoe Sieve Overloading 3/. 2/C 1/0
KEY: 0 = Open F = Forward • = Increase FP = Fast OP = Open Slot
C = Close
A = Add
R = Remove/
Rearward
* = Decrease Position CS = Cover Slot
* Use one or more bar stock grates
** Adding spiked rasp bars to specialty rotor over the separator grate reduces rotor loss and improves
material flow.
120
9-11422
FIELD OPERATION_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 121
Flax Grasses
Initial Crop Settings (Standard Rotor) Initial Crop Settings (Standard Rotor)
Rotor Speed 1050 Rotor Speed 800
Concave Type Small Wire Concave Type Small Wire
Concave Setting Hard Thresh Concave Setting Easy Thresh
Chaffer Setting 3/8 inch Chaffer Setting 3/8 inch
Shoe Setting 1/8 inch Shoe Setting 1/4 inch
Fan Speed 450 RPM Fan Speed 400 RPM
Grate Type Slotted Grate Grate Type Slotted Grate
Bent Grass Blue Grass

Concave Setting Closed Concave Setting 1-1/2
Requires slow speed fan attachment. Requires slow speed fan attachment.
Brome Grass White Clover

Concave Setting 3 Concave Setting Closed
Use minimum available fan speed.
121
9-11422
122
FIELD OPERATlON _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Lintel Beans Pinto Beans

Concave Type Large Wire Concave Type Large Wire
Concave Setting Easy Thresh Concave Setting 3
Fan Speed 500 RPM Fan Speed BOO RPM
Mustard Oats
Concave Type Small Wire Concave Type Large Wire
Concave Setting 4 Concave Setting 3
Black Eye Peas Rape

Concave Type Large Wire Concave Type Small Wire
Concave Setting Easy Thresh Concave Setting 4
Grate Type Bar Grate Grate Type Slotted Grate
122
9-11422
FIELD OPERATION,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 123
Rye Safflower
Concave Type Small Wire Concave Type Large Wire
Concave Setting 2 Concave Setting 4
Grate Type Bar Grate Grate Type Bar Grate
123
9-11422
124 FIELD OPERATION_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
SPECIALTY ROTOR INITIAL CROP SETTINGS

The threshing, separating and cleaning settings in the table are furnished only as a
guide and all settings shown are for average crop conditions. Different crop and field
conditions may require deviations from shown settings. Use good threshing
procedure and past experience to produce desired separation and cleaning results.
Rotor
Chaffer Shoe Fan Grate Transport
Speed Gear Concave Setting Setting Speed Type Vane
Crop (RPM) Range ndicator (4)Type (Inch) (RPM) Position
Barley 800 High 2 SW 1/2 1/4 750 Slotted Middle
Corn 500 Low 3-5 LW 1/2 3/8 1000 Bar Rear

600
Corn (with 300 Low 3-5 LW 1/2 3/8 1000 Bar Rear
straight 450
separator bars)
(1)(2)
Edible Beans 300 Low 3-5 LW 5/8 1/2 900 Bar Middle
(Navy, Pinto, etc.) 600
Flax 850 High 1 SW 3/8 1/8 450 Slotted Middle
Maize/Mile 600 Low 3 LW 1/2 3/8 900 Bar Middle
Rice (3)(2) 850 High 2 LW 1/2 5/16 750 Bar Middle
Soybeans 400 Low 3-4 LW 5/8 3/8 900 Bar Middle

700 High
Wheat 1000 High 2 SW 1/2 1/4 850 Slotted Middle
Grass (5) 600 Low 2-4 SW 3/8 1/4 400 Slotted! Middle
Solid
(1) Straight separator bars may be needed for harvesting com
yielding more than 150 bushels per acre (9400 kg/ha).
(2) Once installed, straight separator bars need to be removed only for harvesting rice and edible beans
and similar viney crops.
(3) Set concave indicator at number 4 when spiked rasp bars are used in the concave area.
(4) LW - Large Wire (1/4 inch Diameter Wire), SW - Small Wire (3/16 inch Diameter Wire).
(5) Use of non-spiked rasp bars in all positions is recommended for most grass seed harvest conditions.
Spiked bars may be helpful in extremely damp crops.
124
9-11422
FIELD OPERATIONI_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 125
MACHINE SEnING FOR VARIOUS CROPS

CROP
Use this chart to keep a record of the various machine settings used to harvest your
crops. Additional copies of this chart are located at the back of this manual.
Date
MACHINE SETTING
Rotor
Speed
Rotor
Gear Ratio
Range
Concave
Indicator
Concave
Type
Chaffer
Setting
Shoe
Setting
Fan
Speed
Grate
Type
Transport
Vane
Position
CropM~~ _____________________________________________
Yield _______________________________________________
RemmQ ________________________________________________
125
9-11422
126 FIELD OPERATION, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
REEL SPEED SELECTOR - REEL LIFT SWITCH -

SEE PAGE 83 SEE PAGE 39
REEL SPEED RATIO - HEADER SENSITIVIlY CONTROL -

SEE PAGE 49 SEE PAGE 82
MINIMUM REEL SPEED CONTROL, HEADER HEIGHT CONTROL KNOB -

REEL SPEED CALIBRATION CONTROL - SEE PAGE 81
SEE PAGE 84
REEL POSmON SWITCH - AUTOMATIC HEADER HEIGHT CONTROL

SEE PAGE 49 SWITCH - SEE PAGE 81
126
9-11422
insert llx17 pg.127-128
127
9-11422
FIELD OPERATION_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 129
Cutting Parts
Proper maintenance and timely section replacement will increase cutterbar effi-
ciency. 1-1/2 inch (3B.1 mm) knife sections and 3 inch (76.2 mm) knife sections are
available. A 1-1/2 inch (3B.1 mm) knife system is recommended for use in down crops
and where shatter loss is a concern, and for use in rice and soybean harvest. A 3 inch
(76.2 mm) knife system is recommended for use in all small grains and sunflowers.
Feeder Chain
Feeder chain tension should be adjusted so there is 1/32 to 1/B inch (O.B to 3.2 mm)
clearance between the slat tips and feeder bottom. The feeder chain slat tip should be
running no further rearward of the feeder than 1-1/2 inches. Feeder chain tension
should be adjusted so there is 1/32 to 1/B inch (O.B to 3.2 mm) clearance between the
slat tips and feeder bottom.
The feeder chain slat tip should be running no further rearward of the feeder face than
1-1/2 inches (3B.1 mm).ln some cases it may be necessary to add links to the feeder
chain. Maintain a clearance between the slat tip and the auger flights.
A 6 pitch feeder chain (slat every 6 links)

is standard for grain and corn combines.
An B pitch feeder chain (slat every Blinks)

with serrated slats is standard for rice
combines.
Three lower-drum stop positions may be utilized to help achieve the desired feeding
throughput. If your machine is equipped with a stone retarder drum, maximum rock
protection is obtained with the upper stop of the drum in its lower pOSition. Most crops
utilize the lowest position, although heavier crops such as corn will require raising the
drum to the upper position. A rock trap is available for most crops and offers
maximum rock protection.
129
9-11422
130 FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Auger Adjustments
Header auger adjustments and optional auger rpm combinations are often over-
looked when setting the header. Check for correct fore-and-aft auger position, re-
tractable finger position, auger speed and auger stripper adjusment. Proper stripper
clearance will reduce material feeding over the auger.
The auger should clear the strippers at closest point by not more than 1/8 inch (3.2
mm). The auger should clear the header bottom at closest point by not more than 1/2
inch (12.7 mm) for most conditions. If combining coarse crops, heavy down crops, or
windrows, a 1 inch (25.4 mm) or more clearance might be required to prevent
plugging auger.
Stripper extensions extend stripper length inward toward the feeder house opening.
These extensions are used to fit different width feeder openings.
The retractable fingers should clear the header bottom by 1/8 to 3/8 inch (3.2 to 9.5
mm) for most conditions. If straw feeds into the header in a thick mass or windrow,
and in heavy crop conditions, better feeding may result if the fingers are adjusted
away from the header bottom so the auger fingers are at maximum extension at the 10
o'clock position on the front auger face.
Optional auger speed sprockets for 1000 Series grain heads are available for various
crop conditions. They include:
152 RPM - 56 Tooth * Use slower speeds when shatter losses are high or
wrapping occurs. Use higher speeds to match
170 RPM - 50 Tooth
auger speed to highest ground speeds.
189 RPM - 45 Tooth
213 RPM - 40 Tooth
Optional header auger flight extensions will improve feeding in various crop condi-
tions. These extensions improve material delivery to the feeder.
* Standard Sprocket
130
9-11422
FIELD OPERATlON_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 131
Leveling The Header
Level the header as follows:

1. Put the combine on level ground.
2. Adjust both drive tires to equal pressure.
3. Loosen the top cover nuts on the top LH side of the feeder housing.
4. To raise the LH end of the header, loosen the rear nut and tighten the front nut on
the header leveling bolts.
To raise the RH end of the header, loosen the front nut and tighten the rear nut on
the header leveling bolt.
5. Tighten the feeder top cover nuts, to a torque of 115 to 130 Ib ft (156 to 176 Nm).
131
9-11422
132
FIELD OPERATION_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Feeder Conveyor Adjustments

Chain Adjustment
Keep the feeder conveyor chain adjusted correctly at all times. Inspect the chain for
correct tension after the first 50 hours of operation and at regular intervals thereafter.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to adjust the chain evenly on both sides to prevent excessive
wear on both chains and sprockets.
The conveyor chain tension is adjusted by moving the feeder drum forward or
rearward. Adjust the chain tension as follows:
1. Loosen the drum arm pivot bolt on

each side of the feeder.
2. Use the adjusting bolt on each side of

the feeder to move the drum forward
to apply tension to the chain.
3. Adjust the conveyor chain to give

clearance of 1/32 to 1/8 inch (0.8 to
3.2 mm) between the chain slats and
the bottom of the feeder housing.
Measure the clearance at the point of
maximum sag of the lower strand of
the conveyor chain.
REAR
4. After adjusting the chain tension,
check the clearance between the
chain slats and the feeder adapter.
The clearance must be no more than
1-1/2 inch (38 mm) to provide correct
feeding and transfer of material from
the header auger.
"
1/32 TO 1/8 INCH
(0.8 TO 3.2 mm)
211L7
132
9-11422
FIELD OPERATION_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 133
5. If the clearance in Step 4 is not correct

add or remove chain links as
necessary and adjust the position of
the drum. See Conveyor Drum
Fore/Aft Adjustments on Page 134 for
more information. Adjust the chain
tension again as specified above.
Conveyor Drum Lower Stop Adjustment

The lower stops for the conveyor drum can be adjusted to keep the drum in a raised
position. To adjust the lower stops, loosen the nuts on the stop bolts. Slide the stop
bolts in the slots to the desired position and tighten the nuts. The recommended
settings are as follows:
For Heavy
Crops (Corn) ............... Upper Position
For Average
Crops ......................... Middle Position
For Crops
Hard To Feed ............ Lower Position.
NOTE: Always adjust the lower stops to

the same position on both sides of the
feeder.
133
9-11422
134
FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Conveyor Drum Fore/Aft Adjustment

The fore/aft position of the conveyor
drum must be adjusted correctly to get
correct feeding of material from the
header auger to the feeder. The position
of the drum must be adjusted for a
maximum clearance of 1-1/2 inch (38
mm) from the conveyor chain slat to the
feeder face.
NOTE: In short crops the 1-1/2 inch (38

mm) maximum may need to be reduced.
The drum is adjusted fore and aft with the

conveyor chain adjusting bolts on each
side of the feeder and by adding or
removing chain links in the conveyor
chain.
Before adding or removing chain links,

check the feeder conveyor chain for
correct tension. See Feeder Conveyor
Chain Adjustment in this manual for
complete instructions.
When the chain tension is correct, add or

remove links from the conveyor chain as
necessary to get the correct clearance.
After adding or removing chain links, the
chain tension must be adjusted again.
134
9-11422
FIELD OPERATION, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 135
Stone Retarder Adjustment (If Equipped)
The stone retarder adjusting blocks limit

the upward movement of the conveyor
drum to help keep stones out of the
separator. The stone retarder has four
positions from minimum to maximum
protection. To adjust the stone retarder
adjusting blocks, loosen the bolts and
turn the blocks to move the bolts to the
desired height. Tighten the bolts.
NOTE: Always adjust the stone retarder

adjusting blocks on both sides of the
feeder to the same position. LOWEST POSITION -
MAXIMUM PROTECTION
182L7
135
9-11422
136 FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Adjusting Accumulator Pressure

The accumulator valve can be used to shut the accumulator off and to regulate the
flow of hydraulic oil into the accumulator. If the header moves up and down too much
when lowered to the cutting height, partially close the accumulator valve.
NOTE: Do not use the accumulator when operating a header with automatic header
height control.
For the accumulator to work correctly, the pressure of the nitrogen gas must be lower
than the normal hydraulic lift pressure. To adjust the pressure, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the valve guard from the ac-

cumulator and open the accumla-
tor valve.
2. Lower the header to the ground, hold

header lift switch in the DOWN posi-
tion for 5 seconds and close the ac-
cumulator valve.
3. Raise the header until the cutter bar or

stalk rolls are 12 to 18 inch (305 to 457
mm) above the ground.
4. Measure the height of the cutter bar or

stalk rolls.
5. Open the accumulator valve. The

header must lower a distance of 6 to
10 inch (152 to 254 mm). If the header
did not lower this amount, remove the
valve cap. Release enough nitrogen
gas until the header has lowered the
full 6 to 10 inch (152 to 254 mm).
136
9-11422
9-11422
FIELD OPERATION_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 139
THRESHING AND SEPARATING

Introduction
The threshing and separating functions of Axial-Flow combines are performed in the
rotor cage area. Material is fed from the feeder to the impeller blade area of the rotor
and flows rearward through the machine. The two most important components to the
threshing and separating processes are the rotor and the concaves.
The rotor threshes the grain and assists in the rearward travel of the material through
the machine. The sooner the grain is threshed out of the heads, the more opportunity
the grain has to separate from the material.
The function of the three-section concave is two-fold. First, the concaves must hold
the material long enough to insure complete threshing. Second the concaves must
have enough capacity to allow the grain to separate into the cleaning system once the
grain has been threshed.
Threshing area adjustments properly made will assist you in obtaining maximum
machine performance. Rotor speed and concave clearance are the two most im-
portant adjustments.
Rotor speed is important to the control of material throughput in the rotor cage.
The two adjustments available to the concaves are their clearance from the rotor rasp
bars and/or the removal or addition of wires, filler bars or interrupter bars.
Concave clearance is determined by the threshing difficulty of the crop. For harder
threshing conditions a close setting is preferred, and for easier threshing conditions,
a wider setting is recommended. The concave indicator setting should never exceed
setting number 5. The wider selections should be used only as cleanout positions. In
hard threshing crops, the concave zero (0) adjustment should be checked.
Rotor speeds and concave clearances must be matched to crop and conditions for
most efficient and productive operation. One common mistake is running rotor too
slow and concave set too open for crop. This results in slow movement of the mate-
rial, inefficient threshing and separation, and a loss in machine capacity.
With the axial-flow concept kernel damage is greatly decreased and is not affected by
rotor speed and concave setting nearly as much as conventional combines are by
cylinder speed and concave adjustment. There is a much broader acceptable range
of settings with the axial-flow.
139
9-11422
140
FIELD OPERATlON _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Movement of material through the rotor cage area is controlled by transport cage
vanes. Relocating the vanes by pivoting them into a more vertical position (rearward
position) results in additional spiraling of crop material for increased threshing and
separation. A more horizontal position (forward position) increases crop material flow
rearward.
Separation is completed in the rear half of the cage area by using grates between the
rotor and cleaning system. See Page 154 of this manual for a description of the avail-
able grates and their applications.
Operators should not hesitate to make adjustments when necessary. but should
make only one adjustment at a time. If no improvement. reset to original position and
proceed to another adjustment.
In the Field
After operating a distance in the field (at least 100 yards) check the threshed straw
behind the combine.
If all the grain has been completely threshed out of the straw and the straw appears to
be mangled or over threshed (Generally in axial-flow threshing. you will find particu-
larily in the drier straw, the straw will be more chopped up) do the following:
1st Slow the rotor rpm
2nd - Open the concaves
3rd - Combination of 1 and 2
In corn if cobs are broken, follow the same steps.
If cobs still have kernels attached and threshing does not appear to be complete, do
the following:
1st - Speed up rotor
2nd - Tighten concaves
3rd - Combination of 1 and 2
In grain if the crop still appears not to be threshed and if not already installed, install a
set of narrow spaced wire concaves (7/16 inch between center of wires).
Generally higher rotor speeds will complete the threshing. Closing the concave will
improve threshing. If the concave is closed, check the quality of the sample in the
grain tank. If skinning or cracking has occured open the concave slightly and slow the
rotor rpm.
Separating and Cleaning Losses

Before making unnecessary adjustments to the combine, check for seed loss by
using the method described under Seed Loss Tables. If, after checking, it is found that
the loss is from the separator then proceed as follows to determine if it is from the rotor
or cleaning system.
140
9-11422
FIELD OPERATION 141
Separation
Most of the separation of the crop from the straw or husks occurs in the concave area
during the threshing cycle. Crop not separated in either the concave area or the grate
area will be lost out of the rear of the combine. These losses are referred to as rotor
losses.
To Determine If Losses Are From Rotor Or Cleaning System

1. Remove straw spreaders.
2. With a shovel, catch a short sample at the rear of the hood. Check kernel loss from
rotor.
3. With a shovel, catch a short sample at the rear of the chaffer. Check kernel loss
from cleaning system.
4. Compare samples to determine where losses are occuring.
To Correct For Rotor Losses

1. Check to see if concave is plugged.
A. If plugged and packed with mud this is generally caused by running header too
close to the ground. Clean concaves and raise header height.
B. If plugged with crop material check concave to rotor clearance. Generally this
type of plugging is caused by excessive concave opening.
2. Check rotor speed to setting as indicated in table for particular crop.

A. Extremely high speeds or extremely low speeds can add to rotor losses.
3. In corn with slotted grates, channels should be on the inside of the grates between
the slotted holes.
4. In grain with slotted grates, the channels should be on the outside of the grates
across the holes. In some cases, in grain, it will be necessary to move the channels
to a position outside the grates and between the slotted holes.
5. All com machines should have the wide wire spaced concaves (13/16 inch center
distance of wires). In some grain crops use of the wide wire spaced concave will
be beneficial in reducing rotor losses.
6. In some peculiar conditions, moving the concave vanes (6) to a less severe angle
will help reduce rotor losses. Although moving the vanes to this less severe angle
could cause excessive use of horsepower and increase in cleaning system loads.
141
9-11422
142 FIELD OPERATlON_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
7. In some edible bean or soybean crops it will be necessary to increase the speed of
the rotor. An indication of poor material flow is rotor rumble and possible slugging
in more adverse conditions.
8. In very heavy crops or high yielding corn crops where large amounts of material
other than grain are going through the machine it might be necessary to slow the
ground speed to reduce the rotor losses.
Rotor losses should be kept as low as possible by doing what has been previously
mentioned, but you must remember that opening the concave by removing concave
wires and excessive rotor speeds and/or too tight concave settings can overload the
cleaning system.
142
9-11422
FIELD OPERATION,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 143
ROTOR
Two Speed Gear Case
The two speed gear case is controlled by
a lever at the top of the separator. under
the RH side panel. Pull the lever out for
LO (low) gear. Push the lever in for HI
(high) gear. The neutral position N, is the
detent between LO and HI. To change
the gear case speed, stop the engine
and move the lever to the selected
position. If the gears do not engage, start
the engine and engage the separator for
a moment to align the shift splines in the
gear case. Stop the engine before
shifting the gears.
NOTE: Be sure the gear case is fully

engaged in the detent before operating.
Rotor Speed Setting

The rotor speed can be changed from
inside the cab while the combine is
operating. Use the rotor speed control
switch on the RH console to change the
rotor speed. Push on the rear half of the
switch to decrease the rotor speed. Push
on the front half of the switch to increase
the rotor speed. See Initial Crop Settings
for the recommended starting speed.
Adjust the speed further according to
crop conditions.
143
9-11422
144
FIELD OPERATION,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Clearing the Rotor

If a large amount of crop cannot be
cleared from the rotor under normal
operation, proceed as follows:
1. Disengage the separator and feeder.
Stop the engine.
2. Lower the concave to the CLEAN OUT

position.
3. Shift the rotor gear case to NEUTRAL

and adjust the rotor speed until the
drive belt is in the mid range position
on both the drive and driven pulleys.
4. Shift the rotor gear case to La.
5. Start the engine and move the throttle

hand lever to the full throttle position.
6. Engage the separator drive. If the

rotor does not clear, immediately
disengage the separator drive, stop
the engine and remove the key from
the key switch.
7. Use the rotor rocking wrench to move

the rotor back and fourth.
NOTE: Chain type rotor rocking wrench

required for combine with slot track cam
torque sensing unit.
8. If the rotor cannot be cleared, the
concaves and grates will have to be
removed and some of the straw must
be removed by hand. See Concave
Removal and Grate Removal.
9. Use the rotor rocking wrench again, to

move the rotor.
10. When the rotor is clear, install the concave and grates.
11. Put the rotor rocking wrench in the storage position.
NOTE: Be sure to adjust the concave to the correct position after clearing the rotor.
Change the rotor gear ratio and rotor speed back to the original setting.
144
9-11422
145
FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Cage Transport Vanes
The top of the rotor cage has transport vanes to help move the crop from the front to
the rear of the rotor. The transport vanes are adjustable in a slot to advance or retard
the crop flow around the rotor lower end. To reduce rotor losses in certain conditions,
adjust the transport vanes over the grate area, to the rear (retard) position, first. If the
rotor loss must still be reduced, adjust the transport vanes over the concave area to
the retarded position. Adjusting the lower end of the transport vanes rearward can
increase horsepower and fuel requirements. Adjusting the transport vanes forward
can increase material flow and ground speed, and can also reduce horsepower and
fuel requirements. For average crop conditions, adjust the transport vanes over both
the concave area and the grate area to the middle position.
Adjust the transport vanes as follows:

1. Remove the LH separator side panels.
2. Loosen the three nuts, on each transport vane to be adjusted, to within 1/8 to 3/16
inch (3 to 5 mm) from the end of the bolts.
145
9-11422
146
FIELD OPERATlON,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
3. Move the lower ends of the transport vanes forward or rearward as required. The
transport vanes over the grate area can be moved individually. The transport
vanes over the concave area are connected in pairs with tie plates.
4. Put a punch through the vane positioning hole to check for middle position only.
Forward (Advance) Position ....................................... Vane to front of the hole.
Middle Position ........................................................ Vane centered under hole.
Rear (Retard) Position ................................................. Vane to rear of the hole.
5. Tighten the nuts on the transport vanes. Tighten the center nuts first, tighten the
nuts on the lower ends second and tighten the nuts on the upper ends last. Tighten
the nuts to a torque at 35 to 40 Ib ft (47 to 54 Nm).
6. Install the LH separator side panels.
146
9-11422
FIELD OPERATION_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 147
Rasp and Separator Bars

The grain and corn combines have
curved and straight rasp bars over the
concave area and separator bars over
the grate area.
The rice combine uses several short rasp

bars over the concave area and the grate
area.
When the rasp bars become worn,

replace the rasp bars. The concave must
be removed to replace the rasp bars. See
Concave Removal.
The separator bars will wear more on the

leading edge than on the trailing edge.
The separator bars can be reversed for
longer wear. To reverse or replace the
separator bars, the grates will have to be
removed. See Grate Removal.
Custom Cutter Package

A Custom Cutter Package is available from the factory and includes a number of com-
ponents made of heavier or special materials for increased wear life of key threshing
Iseparating components. This package includes a long-wear rotor cage transition
cone, impeller wear bars, chromed rotor rasp bars (straight and helical), chromed se-
parator bars, heat-treated small wire concaves and wire reinforced chaffer sieve.
A combine with a specialty rotor can also be'equipped with a Custom Cutter Package.
147
9-11422
148 FIELD OPERATION,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Specialty Crop Rotor Assembly

For threshing viney crops like edible
beans or soybeans when the stems are
not dry, a specialty crop rotor assembly
is available. See your dealer. The spe-
cialty crop rotor can be used to harvest
corn and wheat. Straight separator bars
are provided for use in corn. When corn
is going to be harvested, straight sepa-
rator bars can be substituted for horizon-
tally aligned pairs of spiked or non-
spiked rasp bars. Straight separator bars
improve separation. When installing the
straight separator bars, tighten the
mounting bolts to a torque of 50 to 80 lb ft (68 to 108 Nm).
Rasp bars with spikes or without spikes can be used with the specialty crop rotor.
If material flow through the combine is a problem, install rasp bars without spikes over
the concave area and rasp bars with spikes over the separator grate area. Tighten the
mounting bolts for the rasp bars to a torque of 50 to 80 lb ft (65 to 108 Nm).
148
9-11422
FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 149
CONCAVE
Setting the Concave
The clearance between the rotor and the
concave can be set from the LH side of
the combine.
A ratchet at the top of the separator is

used to adjust the concave. A pointer
moves up and down in a slot next to the
indicator plate to show the change in the
concave setting.
The first three operating positions on the

indicator plate are HARD THRESH, EASY
THRESH (for grain), and CORN. These
settings are indicated as a starting point.
Crop conditions can require other settings to be used. See Initial Crop Settings. The
CLEANOUT position is used only when additional clearance is needed to clear the
rotor. See Clearing the Rotor.
NOTE: When the concave is set to the CLOSED position, the rotor must not make
contact with the concave throughout an entire revolution of the rotor.
Unless instructed otherwise never service or make adjustments to

r-...
the machine with the engine running. Before making adjustments,
. . put the shift control lever in Neutral and set the park brake OR put the
shift control lever in park position as equipped. M147B
149
9-11422
150
FIELD OPERATION,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Adjusting Concave Position
The right to left position of the concave under the rotor can affect the threshing results
of the combine. If the concave support pipe and plates are equipped with drawbolts,
the concave position can be adjusted. The initial position for the concave is with the
seventh concave bar from the left closest to the rotor. When unthreshed heads
become a problem, the concave position can be adjusted to the right, moving the
sixth concave bar closer to the rotor than the seventh concave bar.
Adjust the concave position as follows:

1. Lower the concave to position 3, corn.
2. Loosen the nuts on the RH concave support pipe eyebolts.
3. Loosen the five retaining bolts on both

the front and rear concave support
pipe end plates.
4. Adjust the drawbolts to move the

concave. Adjusting the drawbolts so
that dimension A is smaller will move
the concave to the right. Adjusting the
drawbolts so that dimension A is
longer will move the concave to the
left.
150
9-11422
FIELD OPERATION_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
151
RH CONCAVE SUPPORT
PIPE EYE BOLT
156L8
NOTE: The initial setting for dimension A is 2 inch (51 mm). Make adjustments in 1/8
to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) increments. One full turn of the drawbolt nuts will move the
concave, left or right, one concave bar position.
5. Tighten the lock nuts on the drawbolts.
6. Tighten five retaining bolts on each concave support pipe end plate.
7. Tighten the nuts on the AH concave support pipe eyebolts.
8. Check the adjustment of the concave stop bolts and the gauge indicator position.
See Concave Adjustment in this manual.
9. Set the concave clearance for the crop being harvested.
151
9-11422
152
FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Concave Wire Sizes

Concaves are available with large holes
for 1/4 inch wires and small holes for 3/16
inch wires. Different wire sizes are
recommended for different crops as
follows:
3/16 Inch Wires ................. Small Grains
1/4 Inch Wires .................... Corn, Edible
Beans, Soybeans or
Other Large Seeds
Concaves with 1/4 inch wires can be

used to thresh most small grains.
Concaves with 3/16 inch wires with every
other wire removed can be used to
harvest low acreage amounts of corn,
edible beans or soybean type crops. The
increased distance between wires helps
to reduce rotor loss and crop damage.
A1889
1/4 INCH WIRE 3/16 INCH WIRE
CONCAVES CONCAVES
The concave will have to be removed to remove and install concave wires. The front,
middle and rear concave sections and concave extensions are available separately
to change the concave for various crops and crop conditions.
152
9-11422
FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 153
Concave Filler Bars
A2419
Concave filler bars are available for both the 3/16 inch and 1/4 inch wire concaves.
Filler bars are used to hold the crop over the concaves for a longer time to improve
threshing. When the crop distribution to the cleaning system is too heavy on the RH
side, filler bars can be installed on the RH side of the concave for better distribution.
Concave Interrupter Bars
A2418
Concave interrupter bars are available for both the 3/16 inch and 1/4 inch wire
concaves. Interrupter bars are used for additional threshing capacity in hard
threshing conditions. The same bar is for use on both concave wire sizes.
153
9-11422
154
FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
GRATES
The grate area is at the rear of the rotor
cage assembly. Access to the grates is
through the opening behind the rear LH
side panel. The grates are stationary and
cannot be moved closer to, or farther
away, from the rotor assembly. The
grates are in three sections that are held
together with retaining bolts. The grates
are installed on the bottom of the rotor
cage with mounting bolts on the LH side.
Either slotted grates, 3/8 inch square bar
grates or solid grates can be used.
Slotted Grates
Slotted grates arl3 recommended for
edible beans, most small grain crops
and can also be used for corn. To reduce
the amount of chaff that goes through the
grates to the cleaning system, up to
seven channels can be installed on the
outside of the grates. Installing the
channels in the middle of the slots gives
the minimum opening for grain. Up to
seven channels can be installed on the
inside of the grates for corn. Installing the
channels between the slots gives the
maximum opening for corn. The grates A1901
must be removed to add or remove
channels on the slotted grates.
3/8 Inch Square Bar Grates

3/8 inch square bar grates are recom-
mended for corn, milo/maize and rice.
The square bar grates help to reduce
rotor losses in low moisture corn and
high yield corn. The grates also help to
reduce plugging in damp conditions in
other crops.
A1887
154
9-11422
9-11422
FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 157
GRAIN CLEANING
Introduction
The cleaning activity of the Axial-Flow combine is the final separation of grain from
material that has been distributed through the concaves and separator grates.
Material is separated by the chaffer and shoe sieves to remove unwanted foreign ma-
terial. Chaff and other unwanted material is suspended by air and discharged out the
rear of the combine. Adjustments required for this function are the rpm of the cleaning
fan (controlling air velocity) and the adjustments of both chaffer and shoe sieves. Too
much wind blast on light crops will contribute to cleaning system losses. For extre-
mely light seeded crops, such as grass, proper fan speed may be obtainable only
with the slow fan speed drive package. This kit reduces normal fan speed range of
450 to 1200 rpm down to a ra nge of 156 to 453 rpm. The slow speed fan kit must not
be used with fan air inlet screens. Fan air inlet screens have been designed to keep
foreign material from entering the cleaning system, such as corn cobs, husks, leaves
and chaff.
To ensure optimum efficiency of the cleaning system, the threshed material should be
distributed evenly across the chaffer sieve. Uneven distribution will be improved by
use of the auger bed paddles. Sidehill divider attachments will prevent the drift of
material to the lower side of the chaffer in a sidehill grain operation.
A grain pan extension is also available to keep grain pan material such as heavy corn
cobs from falling into the clean grain auger. This extension, standard on grain com-
bines, may be installed on corn combines to provide a cleaner grain sample under
some conditions.
Only through experimentation will an operator find the correct combination of chaffer
and shoe sieve settings that yield him the maximum grain savings, clean grain tank
sample and reduced tailings return. A number of special configuration sieves are av-
ailable for specialty crop applications.
To Correct Cleaning System Losses

Troubleshooting Your Problems
The first step toward solving any problem is accurately identifying that problem. This
is especially important in combine operation because the machine performs so many
different functions.
Functional problems such as poor cutting action and reel wrapping usually are
obvious and will be uncovered readily when you use the Initial Crop Settings on Page
110.
Problems with internal components are more difficult to analyze. If you're ex-
periencing loss of grain at the separator, you may want to diagnose your problem
through the "quick kill" procedure.
157
9-11422
158 FIELD OPERATION, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Quick Kill Problem Diagnosis

This procedure allows you to inspect the inside of your combine as if it was in opera-
tion. Because the machine must be stopped for inspection, there will be some major
differences between the conditions inspected and those that exist during operation.
Even with these obvious limitations, the procedure can be an extremely useful diag-
nostic tool. To perform a quick kill follow this procedure:
1. Select a relatively level area of the field where the crop is reasonably uniform and
representative. Use the highest transmission gear in which you can achieve the
normal operating speed; i.e. use second gear, if possible.
2. While operating the combine in a normal, steady manner, execute steps a, b, and c
in rapid sequence.
a. With your right hand, move the engine speed control to the slow idle pOSition.
b. With your left hand, move the propulsion control lever to the fastest forward po-
sition.
c. Apply maximum effort to both brake pedals with the pedals locked together.
You may want to use both feet.
Don't turn off key switch until after the quick kill.
NOTE: Although this may appear to be abusive to the combine, it really only uses the
brakes to stop the separator quickly. Without the extemal braking effort, the
momentum of the rotor would continue to drive the separator to a coasting stop. In a
successful quick kill the combine must stop within ten feet.
CAUTION: Never use the quick kill procedure when operating conditions are such
that restarting the rotor might be difficult.
3. Immediately after making the quick kill move the separator drive and feeder clutch
switches to the OFF position. Return the propulsion control lever to the stop posi-
tion, restart the engine, and allow it to cool to a safe shutdown temperature.Then
stop the engine, set the parking brakes, and remove the key from the switch.
4. Remove left hand side shields from the concave and grate areas.
5. Inspect the concaves for indications of plugging of other problems.
6. Check the material in the auger bed for signs of incomplete threshing, kernel
damage, or other abnormal conditions.
7. Agitate the crop material inside the rotor in the grate area. If there are loose kernels
near the rear of the grate area, this probably indicates excessive rotor losses. On
the other hand, relatively few kernels near the front of the grate area would suggest
a reserve of separating capacity.
158
9-11422
159
FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
8. Check the distribution of material on the grain pan and chaffer sieve. The load dis-
tribution on the chaffer sieve should be inspected from the rear as well as the left
hand inspection area.
9. Lower the tailings auger trough door. Inspect the load and load distribution on the
shoe sieve. Check the type and amount of material in the tailings auger trough.
10. Make sure crop material flow is proper in the header, feeder house and elevators.
11. Using all the information available, proceed with adjustments or corrections as
listed in the troubleshooting charts.
12. Replace shields, close the tailings auger trough door, and recheck to be sure the
machine is ready to be restarted safely.
13. To restart a combine after a quick kill, start the engine and allow it to warm up
enough to run normally and evenly. Move the engine speed control to the slow idle
position. Execute step a and then step b as quickly as possible in sequence.
a. Move the separator switch to the ON position.
b. Move the engine speed control to the forward or full-speed position to get all
components up to speed and then, reduce engine speed to 1/2 throttle so
machine can clean itself out.
14. If the rotor is choked, you will have to use the appropriate procedure to clear it.
15. When the separator has operated long enough to be cleared, return the engine
speed control to the slow idle position, activate the feeder clutch switch, and im-
mediately return the engine to full speed.
159
9-11422
160
FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
AUGER BED
Clean Out Door
The augers move the threshed grain to

the rear of the auger bed grain pan, onto
the chaffer sieve and cleaning system.
To clean out the auger bed, remove the

thumbscrews to release the auger clean
out door. Clean out the auger bed when
moving to a different field, or changing
crops. Clean out the auger bed at the end
of the season.
Grain Auger Distribution Paddles

Grain auger distribution paddles can be
installed on the RH augers, if grain
distribution to the chaffer sieve is not
even.
Paddles are to be installed on the auger

shaft, trailing 90 degrees, directly behind
the rear edge of the auger flight. Add
paddles as required, starting with the far
RH auger. Two paddles can be installed
180 degrees from each other, using the
same clamps.
160
9-11422
FIELD OPERATION,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 161
CLEANING FAN
Speed Adjustment
The speed of the cleaning fan can be
adjusted from 450 to 1200 RPM. To
adjust the fan speed. use the cleaning
fan speed control switch on the RH
console. Press down on the rear half of
the switch to decrease the fan speed and
on the front half of the switch to increase
the fan speed. The separator switch must
be in the ON position with the engine
running to change the fan speed.
Operate with the cleaning fan at a speed

fast enough to provide as much air as
possible to the cleaning sieves. without blowing clean grain out the back of the
machine. See Initial Crop Settings for the recommended starting fan speed for the
type of crop being harvested. Adjust the fan speed higher or lower as needed for the
crop conditions. Use the digital tachometer in the fan mode to indicate the fan speed.
Slow Speed Fan Drive

A slow speed fan drive attachment can be installed to lower the fan speed (range of
156 to 453 RPM) and reduce the air volume for light crops such as grasses. The slow
speed fan drive attachment puts an idler pulley between the fan variable speed pulley
and the fan drive shaft pulley. See your Dealer for the slow speed fan drive
attachment. The slow speed fan drive attachment cannot be used with air inlet
shields.
Air Inlet Shields

Air inlet shields can be installed on the LH
and RH sides and on the bottom fan area
of the combine. The shields help to
reduce the amount of leaves drawn into
the fan in such crops as corn and maize.
See your Dealer for the air inlet shields.
Air inlet shields cannot be used with the
slow speed fan drive attachment.
161
9-11422
162
FIELD OPERATION, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
CHAFFER SIEVE
Chaffer Sieve Types
1-1/8 INCH (28.6 mm)

186L7
1-5/8 INCH (41.3 mm)
1-1/8 INCH (28.6 mm) REGULAR 185L7
TOOTH - This sieve is recommended for
1-5/8 INCH (41.3 mm) DEEP TOOTH
small grains. rice. flax or small seed. The
-This sieve is recommended for corn and
sieve opening can be adjusted for
most other large seed crops. The sieve
cleaning in low volume small crops and
uses more air and has a greater opening.
trashy conditions. Because of the smaller
even when closed. than other sieves for
total opening. this sieve has a lower
increased capacity. Because of the
capacity than other sieves.
increased opening. the sieve opening
does not have to be adjusted as wide as
on other sieves. Less plugging with cobs
============== and trash will occur with this sieve. To
clear the sieve. move the adjusting lever
t ~~
to the full open position. then back to the
adjustment setting.
T~C
1-5J81NCH (41.3mm)
184L7
1-5/8 INCH (41.3 mm) REGULAR 1-1/8 INCH (28.6 mm) 183L7
TOOTH - This sieve has a high capacity
in beans and most small grains. Use of 1-1/8 INCH (28.6 mm) - PETERSON
this sieve requires more opening and TOOTH - This sieve is recommended for
less air than the deep tooth sieve. but the grasses and various small seeds. The
capacity is greater than the 1-1/8 inch sieve uses a fin and hole design for air
(28.6 mm) regular tooth sieve. draft control. The sieve helps to remove
straw and stems.
162
9-11422
FIELD OPERATION, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 163
Chaffer Sieve Removal

Remove the chaffer sieve as follows:
1. Remove the fixed or oscillating (as 3. Remove the nuts. bolt and spacer for
equipped) rear axle shield. the chaffer sieve support angles on
each side of the machine.
4. Lower the support angle and remove

the mounting bolts for the chaffer
sieve on each side of the machine.
2. Disconnect the grain scan harness

connector on the left hand side of the
machine. if equipped.
5. Remove the chaffer sieve.
163
9-11422
164
FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Chaffer Sieve Installation

Install the chaffer sieve as follows:
1. Install the chaffer sieve. 4. Connect the grain scan harness con-
nector on the left hand side of the
2. Install the mounting bolt for the chaffer machine, if equipped.
sieve on each side of the machine.
5. Install the fixed or oscillating (as

3. Raise the support angle and install the equipped) rear axle shield.
bolt, spacer and nuts for the chaffer
sieve support angles on each side of
the machine.
164
9-11422
FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 165
Chaffer Sieve Adjustment
A1785.75
The chaffer sieve and sieve extension

can be adjusted from the rear of the
combine. The upper adjusting lever
adjusts the chaffer sieve and the lower
adjusting lever adjusts the chaffer sieve
extension. See Initial Crops Settings for
the recommended starting setting.
The chaffer sieve adjustment is mea-

sured from the top of one vane to the tip
of the next forward vane. Loosen the wing
nut on the sieve adjusting lever.
Slide the adjusting lever in the slot until
the correct setting is obtained and tighten the wing nut. Move the extension adjusting
lever to the right or left to adjust the sieve extension. Use the same setting or a slightly
smaller setting than the chaffer sieve as required by crop conditions.
Grain Pan Side Hill Dividers

When operating on a hillside, grain will
slide to the down hill side of the combine.
Grain pan side hill dividers are available
for installation on the chaffer sieve and on
TOP of the grain pan. See your Dealer
165
9-11422
166
FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
SHOE SIEVE
Sieve Types
Using the correct shoe sieve for the
crops will give a cleaner sample in the
grain tank. Using another shoe sieve can
-reduce the cleaning system capacity or
cause a dirtier sample. Shoe sieve
recommendations are as follows:
t
1-1/8 INCH
1-1/8 INCH (28.6 mm) CLOSZ SLAT CLOSZ SLAT
This sieve is adjustable and can be used
for most crops. 188L7
1-5/8 INCH (41.3 mm) CLOSZ SLAT

This adjustable sieve is recommended
for corn.
1/10 INCH ROUND HOLE - Recom-

mended for alfalfa and clover.

mended for grain sorgums.

mended for peas and soybeans.
1-5/8 INCH I)
CLOSZ SLAT
mended for edible beans and corn. 187L7
Alfalfa Package
To improve the cleaning system performance in alfalfa type crops, a package of per-
forated screens and supports can be installed in the shoe. See your Dealer for the Al-
falfa Package.
166
9-11422
FIELD OPERATlON, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 167
Shoe Sieve Removal

Remove the shoe sieve as follows:
1. Remove the chaffer sieve. See
Chaffer Sieve Removal in this manual
for complete instructions.
6. Remove the support brackets for the

rear axle shield. if equipped.
2. Install the mounting bolt in the chaffer

support channel.
7. Remove the shoe sieve.
3. Open and lower the door for the

tailings auger trough.
4. Remove the rear channel for the

chaffer support.
5. Remove the mounting bolts for the

shoe sieve.
167
9-11422
168
FIELD OPERATlON_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Shoe Sieve Installation

Install the shoe sieve as follows:
5. Raise and close the door for the

tailings auger trough.
1. Install the shoe sieve.
6. Install the mounting bolt in the chaffer

2. Install the support brackets for the support channel.
rear axle shield, if equipped.
7. Install the chaffer sieve. See Chaffer
3. Install the mounting bolts for the shoe Sieve Installation in this manual for
sieve. complete instructions.
4. Install the rear channel for the chaffer
support.
168
9-11422
9-11422
FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 171
GRAIN HANDLING AND MATERIAL DISTRIBUTION

Introduction
The final functions of the balanced combine are conveying cleaned grain and dis-
charging threshed crop residue. Cleaned grain from the Axial-Flow combine is
elevated from the clean grain auger to the grain tank. Crop residue is discharged from
the rear of the rotor by a discharge beater and over the rear axle to straw spreaders.
Elevator capacity may be improved by using steel elevator flights when green or juicy
crop conditions are experienced. Steel elevator flight helps clean sides of the elevator
walls.
If additional grain cleaning at the elevator is desired, perforated elevator troughs,

doors and unloader tube assemblies are available.
Additional checks include proper slip clutch adjustment, tension of drive chain and
proper elevator chain tightness.
Unloader extensions permit on-the-go

unloading into high capacity grain carts.
The 136 inch (3454 mm) unloading
auger tube is standard. The extension will
lengthen the tube to 172 inch (4369 mm).
387L8
For the increasing number of farmers utilizing some method of reduced tillage, the
Axial-Flow straw material distribution design offers unique advantages.
The straw chopper attachment breaks up crop residues to assist in tillage and pest
control. The straw chopper attachment effectively shreds material for more even field
distribution by the straw spreaders. The chopper is installed in place of the standard
discharge beater. The chopper rotor is dynamically balanced to provide smooth vib-
ration free operation. When straw or stem conditions dictate the utilization of a straw
chopper, the straw spreaders can also be utilized to ensure thorough and even distri-
bution of residue. The design improves soil condition by evenly redistributing plant
food material.
Spreader bats can be adjusted to several positions depending on the pattern and
aggressiveness of residue distribution desired by the operator. Positioning the bats
with outer end turned up and angled in the direction of their rotation, will result in the
widest, most aggresive distribution pattern.
171
9-11422
172
FIELD OPERATION, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
ELEVATORS
Clean Out Doors
Both the tailings and the clean grain
elevators have a clean out door for
inspecting the conveyor chains and for
cleaning out the elevator.
Open the doors and clean out the

elevators before harvesting a different
crop. Clean out the elevators at the end of
each day. Leave the doors open when
the combine is not in use to prevent
plugging or freezing.
Check the tension of the elevator chains

weekly.
Steel Flights For Conveyor Chains

Steel flight assemblies can be installed
on the conveyor chains. The steel flight
assemblies are recommended for heavy
crops such as corn and for operation in
wet and muddy conditions. The steel
flight assemblies help to keep dirt from
caking in the grain and tailings elevators.
Two steel flight assemblies per chain,
equally spaced, are recommended for
best results.
Perforated Screens
Perforated screens for the grain auger
trough, auger trough extensions and
elevator clean out doors can be installed
to help remove fines and foreign material
during the grain handling process. See
your Dealer.
172
9-11422
FIELD OPERATION, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 173
GRAIN TANK AND UNLOADER

Leveling Auger Adjustment
Depending on the type of crop and crop
conditions it will be necessary to adjust
the leveling auger in the grain tank to get
even loading of the grain tank. To adjust
the auger loosen the set screws and
move the auger on the shaft to the
needed position. Tighten the set screws.
Unloader Auger Cover

Adjustment
The covers on the unloader augers can
be adjusted to maintain even unloading
of the grain tank. The covers can also be
used to adjust the volume of material
being unloaded, to vary unloading times
and to prevent overloading the unloader
drive in heavy crop conditions.
To adjust the covers, loosen the cover

mounting bolts and move the cover up or
down as required. Tighten the cover
mounting bolts.
In certain crop conditions, such as grass
seeds, it can be necessary to remove the
covers completely to improve the
unloading of the grain tank. These crop
conditions can also cause the material to
hesitate during the unloading process. If
agitation of the material is necessary it
must be done from the operators
platform using a pole or broom. If it
becomes necessary to agitate the
material at the rear of the grain tank it
must be done by a second person from
the engine service area using a pole or
broom. One person must remain in the
operators cab to stop the engine if
necessary.
A DO NOT enter the grain tank when the combine is running. The
rotating augers in the bottom of the grain tank can cause severe
injury including possible loss of limbs. M192
173
9-11422
174
FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Clean Out Door

A Glean out door is provided at the lower
end of the vertical unloader tube. Keep
the area clean when the combine is not in
use to prevent damage to the unloader
mechanism. Be especailly careful during
freezing temperatures.
Perforated Unloader Tube (If Equipped)

The perforated unloader tube can be
used when operating in corn or bean
crops to remove cracks and fines while
unloading the crop into the transport
vehicle.
To uncover the perforated tube, loosen

the four clamps on the unloader tube and
rotate the cover one half turn. Tighten the
four clamps.
T88693
Long Unloader Tube

A 172 inch (4369 mm) long un loader tube can be installed for operation with wide
grain headers and corn heads. The longer unloader tube is used so that the unloading
grain being unloaded can reach the transport vehicle. See your Dealer for the long
unloader tube.
174
9-11422
175
FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Unloader Drive Shear Bolt

The unloader drive shear bolt is designed
to protect the drive and gear housing if
plugging occurs during grain tank un-
loading.
Replacement shear bolts are in a holder

to the left of the unloader clean out door.
175
9-11422
176
FIELD OPERATION,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
DISCHARGE BEATER
Bottom Adjustment
1. The discharge beater bottom is adjustable. Loosen the two bolts on each side of
the combines for the beater bottom adjustment.
2. Move the bolts on each side of the combine to the bottom of the adjustment slots
for corn and to the top of the adjustment slots for grain. Tighten the bolts.
NOTE: It is important that the discharge beater bottom be set at the bottom of the ad-
justment slots for corn to prevent damage to the beater.
The rice combine has a spring loaded

beater bottom and does not have the ad-
justable slot settings on each side of the
combine.
157L8
SPRING LOADED BEATER BOTTOM
(RICE COMBINE ONLy)
176
9-11422
177
FIELD OPERATlON,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
STRAW SPREADER
Cone Removal
The straw spreader distributes the straw from the beater evenly over the ground. This
helps to prevent bunching and windrowing, making plowing and tillage operations
easier.
For better windrowing when the straw is to be baled, remove the cone retaining pins
and slide the cones off of the spreader shafts. Always clean the shafts and apply
clean Case IH 251 H EP grease on the shafts before installing the cones.
h Avoid injury from rotating spreader or thrown material. Do not stand

. . behind combine when the spreader is turning. M191
177
9-11422
178
FIELD OPERATION,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Bat Adjustment
The rubber bats on the spreader cones are adjustable to increase or decrease the
spreading effect. The bats give the most spreading effect in the No.1 position. Use
the other two positions to decrease the spreading. Install the bats with the curved end
turned down to decrease the spreading some more. For a further decrease in
spreading, install the bats on the bottom side of the blade supports.
LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE
NO.1 POSmON --~

158L8
Spreader Hoop Deflector

Shields
Shields deflect material thrown forward
by the spreaders. Shields are standard
equipment on corn and rice machines.
Shields are recommended for use in
heavy trash grain crops.
178
9-11422
179
FIELD OPERATION, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
STRAW CHOPPER (IF EQUIPPED)

Speed Adjustment
To change the straw chopper speed, proceed as follows:

1. Move the idler pulley handle down to release the idler pulley.
2. Position the belt over the desired set of pulleys.
High Speed - Large Drive Pulley (Upper Pulley)
- Small Driven Pulley (Lower Pulley)
Slow Speed - Small Drive Pulley (Upper Pulley)

- Large Driven Pulley (Lower Pulley)
3. Engage the idler pulley by moving the idler pulley handle up until the channel stop
drops into place over the spring.
NOTE: Be sure to adjust the straw chopper concave and concave blades after
changing the straw chopper speed.
179
9-11422
180
FIELD OPERATION,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Concave Adjustment
- ---- 15918
The straw chopper operates at a speed of approximately 2,736 RPM with the drive
belt in the high speed position and at a speed of approximately 685 RPM with the drive
belt in the low speed position.
Loosen the concave adjusting bolts on each side of the combine and move the
concave up or down for the correct clearance. The correct concave to rotor tip clear-
ance is 1/16 to 3/16 inch (1.6 to 4.8 mm).
h The straw chopper rotor is running at all times when the separator is
. . engaged. Be sure the shielding is in place before operating the
choppe~ M1M
The straw chopper rotor operates whenever the separator is in

operation. Be sure to disengage the separator, shut off the engine,
remove the key from the key switch and make sure the rotor has
stopped spinning before reaching into or working in the separator
area. M181
180
9-11422
FIELD OPERATION, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 181
To Chop and Spread Straw

Operate the straw chopper at the high speed. Set the concave to rotor tip distance at
1/16 to 3/16 inch (1.6 to 4.8 mm).
The concave blade assembly can be inserted into or retracted from the concave for
the desired cut length, coarse, medium or fine.
NOTE: When the straw is to be baled, operate the straw chopper at the corn setting.
With the corn settings, the straw chopper will not chop the straw too fine and
windrowing will be better.
To Chop and Spread Corn

Operate the straw chopper at the slow speed.
Remove the concave blade assembly.
Adjust the concave bottom to the middle of the adjusting slat.
181
9-11422
182
FIELD OPERATION, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
SEED LOSS
New standards have been written for reduced field losses, improved grain quality and
simplified machine operation. The axial-flow combine has performed in harvesting
conditions previously thought to be too adverse for successful combine operation.
With minimal field losses as his goal, the axial-flow operator has more latitude to
adjust for maximum combine efficiency. Understanding crop flow and functions pre-
viously discussed makes adjustment for field losses easier. A spontaneous adjust-
ment, without thorough analysis and diagnosis of specific reason for the crop loss,
could lead the operator away from the correct machine adjustment. A universal har-
vesting rule is to set your combine to manual specifications first, then adjust. See
Initial Crop Settings on Page 110. Make only one adjustment at a time, then re-
evaluate.
When adjusting a combine, it is important to note that no combine will save every
seed. Combines can be operated at speeds and settings which range from almost
zero loss to extremely heavy losses. Each operator must determine what loss to
accept for the field condition and time available for harvest. He must adjust the
combine and travel speed accordingly. Losses should be checked in several sports
and averaged to eliminate the effects of any uneven feeding.
When checking loss it is important to determine the source of the loss before making
adjustments. Checking losses where the separator empties without considering
whether they originate from preharvest causes, header causes, or the separator can
lead to unnecessary or erroneous adjustments.
The formula below has three major areas of loss:

Preharvest Loss + Header Loss + Separator Loss = Total Loss
When measuring losses, take a full cut with the header at your regular operating
speed without using the spreaders. Stop the combine in an area of the field that repre-
sents an average of the field. Do not use rows that are near the edges of the field and
do not make your measurements near the end of the field. Allow the combine to clear
after stopping and back up a distance equal to its length. You can then check all loss
points without starting and stopping again. Caution! Be sure machine is shut down
and all moving components completely stopped before starting evaluations.
Minimize Your Pre-Harvest Losses

This is loss that is present before you harvest the crop. This loss is kernels or seeds on
the ground due to weather, insect damage and other adverSity. These losses cannot
be recovered, no mater how efficient the combine is.
To determine the amount of preharvest losses, look in the unharvested crop for
kernels, seeds, seed heads, ears of corn, etc. on the ground that the header would be
unable to gather. To measure the amount of loss in bushels, refer to the Seed Loss
Tables.
182
9-11422
FIELD OPERATlON_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 183
Be sure to use the uniform spread column and select the crop you are harvesting. The
number shown in this column is the number of seeds per square foot to equal one
bushel per acre loss. This number is divided into the number of kernels you found to
come up with the bushel per acre pre-harvest loss.
AREAC
390LB
Header Losses
Header loss is due to cutting too high, reel shatter, snapping roll loss, etc. This can be
measured by comparing the kernels on the ground in Area B to Area A. The difference
would be due to header losses. If a more precise measurement is required. refer to
the seed loss tables and determine seed loss the same as you did for pre-harvest
losses. then subtract the pre-harvest loss to obtain the header loss:
Loss in Area B - Loss in Area A = Header Loss

To reduce header losses. make sure the header is adjusted properly as explained in
the Header Operator's Manual.
Separator Losses
This is loss from the rotor and cleaning system such as unthreshed heads. etc. which
are a result of improper adjustments or lack of proper attachments. To obtain this
loss. check Area C which is windrowed directly behind the separator. The grain in this
area would be all losses. Subtract the preharvest (area A) and the header losses (Area
B) from this measurement to determine the separator loss. For a more precise mea-
surement, refer to the Seed Loss Tables to obtain the amount of loss in bushels or
pounds per acre for your machine.
Before making adjustments. make sure there are no grain leaks due to missing bolts,
clean out doors open. etc. If separator loss is high. it is necessary to determine
whether the loss is from the rotor or cleaning system.
To determine whether the separator loss is due to the rotor or cleaning system. fully
open the shoe and chaffer sieve.
183
9-11422
184
FIELD OPERATION_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
NOTE: This procedure will cause a poor sample due to excessive trash in the grain
sample during the test. If separator loss remains high it is due to rotor losses. If sepa-
rator loss decreases the loss is due to improper cleaning system adjustment.
Sieve settings are essentially the same with an axial-flow combine as in the past with
conventional combines. Too heavy tailings could result in rotor losses.
There are three basic adjustments for the cleaning system. These are opening and
closing the chaffer, opening and closing the shoe and cleaning fan rpm changes. The
main air blast is directed to the front part of the chaffer. Air speed should be sufficient
to lift material and suspend it in the air, letting heavier particles (grain) down. If under-
blown, material will ride on the chaffer and grain will be sloughed off the end of the
chaffer. If overblown grain will be picked up and blown beyond the end of the chaffer.
The need for cleaning shoe adjustments can be easily determined by monitoring
grain tank samples, tailings, and losses on the ground. If tailings are excessive, open
the shoe slightly. If grain tank sample is trashy close the shoe and/or increase the fan
speed. Too wide of a chafter sieve opening can add to excessive tailings.
An overloaded shoe sieve and high tailings can also be the result of too low fan speed
setting instead of too open chaffer setting. It is important to remember that the air
velocity through the chaffer sieve will change by changing the sieve opening. (With
constant fan speed). Therefore the more the chaffer sieve is opened the faster the fan
speed should be set in order to continue to lift the lighter chaff material and blow it out
the rear. This is handy to remember when more capacity is desired from the cleaning
system.
For side hill operations, chaffer dividers are available.
184
9-11422
FIELD OPERATION_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 185
Seed Loss Tables

SEEDS LOST PER SQUARE FOOT TO EQUAL ONE BUSHEL PER ACRE (1)
GATHERED DIRECTLY BEHIND SEPARATOR (2)
CUTTING WIDTH UNIFORM
15 FT 16.5 FT 17.5 FT 20FT 22.5 FT 25 FT SPREAD
CROP (4.6 m) (5.0 m) (5.3 m) (6.1 m) (6.9 m) (7.5 m) LOSS (3)
OATS 36 40 42 48 54 60 9.3
BARLEY 68 74 79 90 101 112 17.4
WHEAT 75 82 87 99 112 125 19.2
RYE 144 158 168 191 215 240 37
FLAX 403 443 470 537 604 672 103.8
MAIZE 75 83 88 100 113 125 19.4
SOYBEAN 14 15 16 19 21 23 3.6
RED KIDNEY
BEANS 5 6 6 7 8 9 1.2
RICE 66 73 77 88 99 110 17
WHITE
PEA BEANS 8 9 10 11 12 14 3.7
SEEDS LOST PER SQUARE FOOT TO EQUAL ONE POUND PER ACRE (1)
GATHERED DIRECTLY BEHIND SEPARATOR (2)
CUTTING WIDTH UNIFORM
15 FT 16.5 FT 17.5 FT 20 FT 22.5 FT 25 FT SPREAD
CROP (4.6 m) (5.0 m) (5.3 m) (6.1 m) (6.9 m) (7.6m) LOSS (3)
RED CLOVER 24 26 28 32 36 40 6.2
RYE GRASS 25 27 29 33 37 42 6.4
(1) The figures are approximate and could vary with seed size and seed variety.
(2) Seeds are gathered directly behind the separator. No spreading device, such as
a straw spreader is used.
(3) The number of seeds per square foot that could be spread evenly over an acre to
equal a loss of one bushel or one pound per acre.
185
9-11422
186
FIELD OPERATION _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Corn Loss Table

CORN HEAD ROW SEPARATOR LOSS UNIFORM
MODEL SPACING IN KERNELS SPREAD
PER FT2 (1) LOSS (2)
28 INCH 4.4 1.84
1043 (711 mm)
(4 ROW) 30 INCH 4.8 1.84

(762 mm)
36 INCH 5.7 1.84
1044 (914 mm)
(4 ROW) 38 INCH 6.0 1.84

(965 mm)
40 INCH 6.3 1.84

(1016 mm)
36 INCH 7.1 1.84
1054 (914 mm)
(5 ROW) 38 INCH 7.5 1.84

(965 mm)
40 INCH 7.9 1.84

(1 016 mm)
28 INCH 6.7 1.84
1063 (711 mm)
(6 ROW) 30 INCH 7.1 1.84

(762 mm)
36 INCH 8.6 1.84
1064 (914 mm)
(6 ROW) 38 INCH 9.0 1.84

(965 mm)
40 INCH 9.5 1.84

(1016 mm)
28 INCH 8.9 1.84
1083 (711 mm)
(8 ROW) 30 INCH 9.5 1.84

(762 mm)
(1) The figures are approximate and could vary with kernel size and seed corn variety.
Kernels were gathered directly behind separator and do not include row loss due
to corn head, and no spreading device such as straw spreader was used.
(2) Uniform loss in number of kernels per square foot that must be spread evenly over
an acre to equal loss of one bushel per acre 80,000 kernels per bushel.
186
9-11422
TIRES/WHEELS/TRACKS/SPACING/BALLAST _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 187
SECTION INDEX
Drive Axle ...... ................................... 196 Power Guide Wheel Drive ................ 205
Drive Wheels ................................. 196 Hydraulic Motor Type ................... 205
Ground Clearance ........................ 197 Planetary Gear Type ..................... 207
Low............................................ 197 Gear Assembly ......................... 208
High ........................................... 197
Long Axle Extension ..................... 196 Steering Axle ............................. 201-204
Short Axle Extension ..................... 196 Pivot Support Positions ................ 203
Wheel Spacers ............................. 196 Drive and Steering Tire
Combination Charts .................. 204
Drive Tracks .............................. 198-200 Toe-ln ............................................ 201
Lubrication .................................... 200 Weights ......................................... 209
Shoe Bolt ...................................... 199 Wide Adjustable Axle .................... 202
Tension ......................................... 199
Increase .................................... 200 Steering Wheels ........................ 193-195
Decrease ................................... 200 Hub Bolt Torque ........................... 195
Tread Width ........................... 193-194
Drive Wheels ............................. 190-192
Dual Wheels .................................. 190 Tire Inflation ...................................... 188
Hub Nut Torque ............................ 192 Pressure Chart .............................. 189
Tire Size Required
For Header Size
With Rock Trap ......................... 191
Without Rock Trap .................... 191
Tread Positions ............................. 190
187
9-11422
188
TIRES/WHEELSITRACKS/SPACING/BALLAST _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
TIRE INFLATION
NOTE: Upon receiving your combine, immediately adjust the air pressure in the tires
as indicated in the table.
Keep the tires properly inflated to the pressure shown in the inflation pressure table for
the front and rear tires. Both underinflation and overinflation are detrimental to tire life.
Check tire pressure weekly or after 50 hours of operation.
When combines are transported on a carrier, such as a railroad car or trailer, the tires
are inflated to 30 pounds per square inch (207 kPa) to make possible rigid blocking
and to prevent bouncing. Pressure must be decreased to operating pressure before
the combine is put into service.
Make sure that the tire valve caps are in place and are tightened securely to prevent
loss of air and protect the valve core and stem.
A Use a clip on air chuck. extension hose with gauge and stand away
from the tire while inflating to prevent the possibility of personal
injury due to a tire and rim separation. etc. M197
A tire can explode during inflation and cause serious Injury or

death. Never increase air pressure beyond 35 PSI to seat the bead
on the rim. Replace a tire if it has a defect. Replace a wheel rim
which has cracks. wear or severe rust. Make sure that all the air is
removed from a tire before removing the tire from the rim. Never use
force on an inflated or partially inflated tire. Make sure the tire is cor-
rectly seated before inflating. M170
188
9-11422
189
TIRES/WHEELS/TRACKS/SPACING/BALLAST _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Tire Pressure Chart
TIRE PLY TREAD TIRE PRESSURE

SIZE RATING TYPE PSI (kPa)
11.00-16 8 F2 36 (250)
11.2-24 6 R1 30 (207)
12.4-16 8 R3 36 (250)
14.9-24 6 R1 20 (138)
14.9-24 6 R2 20 (138)
16.9-26 6 R1 18 (124)
16.9-26 6 R2 18 (124)
18.4-16.1 6 R1 20 (138)
18.4-26 6 R1 16 (110)
18.4-26 6 R2 16 (110)
18.4-38 8 R1 24 (165)
23.1-26 12 R1 28 (193)
23.1-26 12 R3 28 (193)
24.5-32 10 R1 24 (165)
24.5-32 12 R1 28 (193)
24.5-32 10 R2 24 (165)
24.5-32 10 R3 24 (165)
24.5-32 12 R3 28 (193)
28L-26 10 R1 22 (152)
28L-26 10 R2 22 (152)
28L-26 10 R3 22 (152)
28L-26 12 R1 24 (165)
30.5L-32 10 R1 20 (138)
30.5L-32 10 R2 20 (138)
30.5L-32 12 R2 20 (138)
67 x 34-30 10 Flow- 25 (172)
Grip
189
9-11422
190
TIRES/WHEELSrrRACKS/SPACING/BALLAST _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
DRIVE WHEELS
Tread Positions
CENTER TO CENTER WHEEL TREAD
WHEELS WHEELS (w/Axle Extension)
TIRE DISHED IN DISHED IN DISHED OUT DISHED IN DISHED IN DISHED OUT
SIZE w/SPACER* w/SPACER*
Inch Inch Inch Inch Inch Inch
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
23.1-26 N.A. 100 108 106 112 120
(2540) (2743) (2692) (2845) (3048)
24.5-32 NA 100 108 106 112 120
(2540) (2743) (2692) (2845) (3048)
28L-26 N.A. 100** 108 106 112** 120
(2540) (2743) (2692) (2845) (3048)
30.5L-32 N.A. 100 108 106 112 120
(2540) (2743) (2692) (2845) (3048)
67 x 34-30 NA NA 108 N.A. 112 120
(2743) (2845) (3048)
TRACK 112
(2845)
N.A. = Not Applicable

* Dimensions given are the wheel tread with 3 inch (76 mm) wheel spacers. Subtract 2 inches (51 mm)
from the dimensions given when using the 2 inch (51 mm) wheel spacers.
** The valve stem must be installed on the shallow side of the wheel.
Dual Wheels
CENTER TO CENTER WHEEL TREAD
TIRE SIZE INNER WHEELS OUTER WHEELS
DISHED IN DISHED OUT
Inch (mm) Inch (mm)
18.4-38 120 (3048) 180 (4572)
190
9-11422
191
Minimum Tire Size Required For

Maximum Header Size Without Rock Trap
Minimum Tire Wheel Header Size Com Head
Drive Tire Rating Tread Feet (m) Size
Size Inch 1010 1020
(mm)
23.1-26 12 Ply 10S 20 20 1064
(2743) (6.10) (6.10)
24.5-32 10 Ply 108 25 25 10S3
(2743) (7.62) (7.62)
2SL-26 10 Ply 108 17.5 17.5 1063
(2743) (5.33) (5.33)
2SL-26 12 Ply 10S 22.5 22.5 1083
(2743) (6.S6) (6.S6)
30.5L-32 10 Ply 108 25 25 1083
(2743) (7.62) (7.62)
3O.5L-32 12 Ply 108 25 25 1083
(2743) (7.62) (7.62)
67 x 34-30 10 Ply 108 25 25 1083
(2743) (7.62) (7.62)
Track - - 25 25 1083
(7.62) (7.62)
Minimum Tire Size Required For

Maximum Header Size With Rock Trap
Minimum Tire Wheel Header Size Com Head
Drive Tire Rating Tread Feet (m) Size
Size Inch 1010 1020
(mm)
23.1-26 12 Ply 108 17.5 17.5 1063
(2743) (5.33) (5.33)
24.5-32 10 Ply 10S 25 25 1083
(2743) (7.62) (7.62)
2SL-26 10 Ply 10S 17.5 15 1054
(2743) (5.33) (4.57)
2SL-26 12 Ply 10S 20 20 1064
(2743) (6.10) (6.10)
3O.5L-32 10 Ply 10S 25 25 1083
(2743) (7.62) (7.62)
67 x 34-30 10 Ply 10S 25 25 1083
(2743) (7.62) (7.62)
Track - - 25 25 10S3
(7.62) (7.62)
191
9-11422
192
TIRES/WHEELSfTRACKS/SPACING/BALLAST_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Drive Wheel Hub Nut Torque

On new machines or after changing
wheels, check the hub nuts on the drive
wheels. Check the hub nuts after the first
hour of operation, then every 10 hours of
operation for the first week. These nuts
must be kept tight at all times. Tighten the
nuts to a torque of 300 Ib ft (407 Nm).
Dual Drive Wheel Hub Nut Torque (If Equipped)

wheels, check the hub nuts on the drive
wheels. Check the hub nuts after the first
operation for the first week. These nuts
must be kept tight at all times. Tighten the
nuts to a torque of 350 Ib ft (475 Nm).
When the inner wheel has been removed

or is being installed, the bolt threads
must be lubricated prior to installing jam
nut. Torque jam nuts to 200 Ib ft (290
Nm). Wipe the exposed threads clean
and apply grease to the threads prior to
installing the outer wheel, washers and
dual wheel hex nuts. Torque dual wheel
hex nuts to 350 Ib ft (475 Nm).
When the outer wheel is removed to

transport combine or for storage, the
washers and dual wheel hex nuts must
be installed and torqued to 350 Ib ft (475
Nm). The header must be removed and
the grain tank empty.
DUAL~ 1
HEX NUT
JAM NUT
413L7
192
9-11422
193
TIRES/WH EE LS/TRAC KS/SPACI NG/BALLAST _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
STEERING WHEELS
Tread Width
GRAIN AND CORN COMBINE
WIDTH ADJUSTMENTS - INCREMENTS OF 4 INCH (102 mm)
TIRE FIXED NARROW WIDE WIDE

SIZE TREAD ADJUSTABLE ADJUSTABLE ADJUSTABLE
(72 INCH) TREAD TREAD TREAD
(56 TO 68 INCH) (67 TO 91 INCH) (92 TO 120 INCH)
INCH INCH INCH INCH
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
10.00-16 F2 71.1 58.3 to 70.3 67.3 to 91.3 90.3 to 118.3

(1 826) (1 481 to 1 785) (1709t02319) (2 293 to 3 005)
11.00-16 F2 72 59 to 71 68 to 92 91 to 119
(1828) (1 498 to 1 803) (1 727 to 2 337) (2 311 to 3 022)
11.2-24 R1 ** NA N.A. 75.5 to 91.5 90.5 to 118.5

(1 918 to 2 324) (2299 to 3 011)
12.4-16 R3 72.1 59.1 to 71.1 68.1 to 92.1 91.1 to 119.1

(1832) (1 502 to 1 806) (1 731 to 2 340) (2315 to 3 026)
18.4-16.1 R1* NA NA 86 to 98 105 to 125

(2 184 to 2 489) (2 667 to 3 174)
NA = Not Applicable
* Minimum Tread Setting - 85.9 inch (2182 mm)
** Minimum Tread Setting - 73.4 inch (1864 mm)
RICE COMBINE
WIDTH ADJUSTMENTS -INCREMENTS OF 4 INCH (101.6 mm)
NARROW ADJUSTABLE WIDE ADJUSTABLE
TIRE TREAD TREAD
SIZE (68 TO 88 INCH) (92 TO 120 INCH)
INCH (mm) INCH (mm)
11.2-24 R1* 76.1 to 88.1 (1 933 to 2 239) 92.1 to 120.1 (2340 to 3 052)
14.9-24 R1 ** NA 104.1 to 120.1 (2642 to 3 052)
18.4-16.1 R1 ** NA 103.8 to 123.8 (2 637 to 3 143)
N.A. =; Not Applicable

* Minimum Tread Setting - 73.4 inch (1864 mm)
** Minimum Tread Setting - 104 inch (2641 mm)
193
9-11422
194
GRAIN, CORN AND RICE COMBINES

POWER GUIDE WHEEL TREAD
TIRE SIZE INCH (mm)
14.9-24 R1 108 to 120 (2 743 to 3 048)
14.9-24 R2 108 to 120 (2 743 to 3 481)
16.9-26 R1 108 to 120 (2 743 to 3 048)
16.9-26 R2 108 to 120 (2 743 to 3 048)
18.4-26 R1 108 to 120 (2 743 to 3 048)
18.4-26 R2 108 to 120 (2 743 to 3 048)
194
9-11422
195
TIRES/WHEELSrrRACKS/SPACING/BAlLAST _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Steering Wheel Hub Bolt Torque

wheels, check the hub bolts or nuts on
the steering wheels. Check after the first
operation for the first week. These bolts
or nuts must be kept tight at all times.
Tighten the steering wheel hub bolts to a
torque of 110 Ib ft (149 Nm). Tighten the
power guide wheel hub nuts to a torque
of 350 Ibft (474 Nm) or 1251bft (169 Nm)
if equipped with planetary power guide
wheel drive.
STANDARD WHEEL
HYDRAULIC MOTOR TYPE PLANETARY GEAR TYPE
195
9-11422
196
DRIVE AXLE
Drive Wheels
Operate the combine with the drive wheels turned out for maximum tread. The wide
tread will help the stability of the combine. Operate the combine with the drive wheels
turned in to the minimum tread only when harvesting on level ground or in certain row
crop conditions.
A When operating the combine with the wheels turned in for minimum
tread, extreme care must be used to prevent the combine from
tipping over. M179
IMPORTANT: When removing or installing the 28L-26 tires, position the tire with the
valve stem toward the front of the combine to prevent contact and possible damage
between the tire valve stem and the final drive housing.
Short Axle Extensions

For row crop use, axle extensions can be
installed on the combine. The axle
extensions will increase the wheel tread
by 12 inch (305 mm). See Drive Wheel
Tread Positions for the wheel treads with
axle extensions installed.
Long Axle Extensions

This extension provides a constant 144
inch (3 658 mm) wheel tread. Combine
must be equipped with 24.5-32 inch or
larger tires (wheels must be dished in).
Wheel Spacers
Wheel spacers are available in 2 inch (51
mm) or 3 inch (76 mm) widths and will be
required on some tire sizes when the
wheels are dished in. See Drive Wheel
Tread Positions for the wheel treads with
wheel spacers installed.
196
9-11422
High and Low Ground Clearance
LOW CLEARANCE
HIGH CLEARANCE
The final drive housing can be adjusted to give an additional 3-1/2 inch (89 mm) of
clearance. To keep the combine level see Steering Axle Pivot Support Positions. Page
203 for steering axle adjustments.
To adjust the feeder face adapter when changing from the low to the high clearance
position see Feeder Adjustment For Tire Size. Page 98.
When changing from the low to the high clearance position. it will be necessary to
install a street elbow in the final drive check and fill hole. Install the street elbow in an
upright position and install the oil level plug in the end of the street elbow.
197
9-11422
198
DRIVE TRACKS (IF EQUIPPED)

The combine drive tracks must be maintained on a regular basis. Proper mainte-
nance will prevent premature wear and extend the service life of the track mechanism.
See the instructions below for track shoe bolt torque, track tension adjustment and
lubrication.
If necessary the drive tracks can be removed from a track combine and rubber tires in-
stalled. When a track combine is equipped with rubber tires, operate the combine at a
safe ground speed. DO NOT exceed 20 MPH.
14229
IMPORTANT: Grain and corn combines equipped with the 36137 gear transmission
and the two speed hydrostatic propulsion motor have an electrical lockout switch to
prevent the hydrostatic propulsion motor from operating in HI range when the
transmission is in 3rd gear. Track combines do not have the lockout switch. Always
operate a track combine equipped with rubber tires and the 36137 gear transmission in
LO range when in 3rd gear.
h If combine is equipped with rubber tires, operate propulsion motor

.. to maintain safe ground speed. DO NOT EXCEED 20 MPH. M188A
198
9-11422
Track Shoe Bolt

Check the shoe bolt torque every 10 hours for the first 50 hours of operation and on a
regular schedule thereafter.
Tighten the shoe bolts to a torque of 115 to 130 Ib ft (156 to 176 Nm). When tightening
the shoe bolts, hit the shoe bolts a number of times with a hammer. Tighten the bolts
again to the above torque.
A To help prevent personal injuries during operation and

mamtenance. use safety shoes, a hard hat, safety glasses or
goggles and good fitting clothing. M100A
Track Tension Adjustment

Check the track tension every 10 hours for the first 50 hours of operation. Check the
track tension once each season of operation thereafter.
Adjust the track to have a two inch sag between a straight edge and the track.
Measure the distance half way between the drive sprocket and the rear idler with the
rest of the track tight. Backing the combine a few feet will tighten the track and allow
sag between the drive sprocket and rear idler.
Track tension is adjusted with hydraulic pressure to the rear idler fork. Remove the
valve shield and adjust the track tension as follows:
To avoid possible injury. always stand to the side of the adjuster
A fitting. Pressure in idler fork is held by ball check and bleeder plug. A
loose thread can allow either part to be ejected by lubricant
pressure. Before increasing track tension. tighten ball check and
bleeder plug to 45 to 50 Ib ft (61 to 68 Nm) torque. M185
Before disconnecting the track chain for any reason, be sure to first
relieve pressure in the hydraulic track adjuster. Follow the instruc-
A tions and cautions for reducing track chain tension. THIS MUST BE
DONE FOR SAFETY REASONS, EVEN IF THERE IS SLACK IN THE
CHAIN! M186
199
9-11422
200
TIRES/WHEELSffRACKS/SPACING/BALLAST _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
INCREASE TRACK TENSION

VALVE ~
To increase track tension connect a SHIELD • /
REUEF VALVE 0 LUBRICATION
lubricator nozzle to the lubrication fitting. '- FITIING
Add CASE IH 251 H EP grease until the
~
chain tension is correct. r
I 1./ i
. /BALL
CHECK
VALVE
DECREASE TRACK TENSION REUEF PASSAGE "1
To decrease track tension, do the \~j r

following:
A. Put a wire in the two relief passages l~
inside the adjuster fork in front of the
rear idler.
REAR IDLER FORK

152L8
A Use extreme care when relieving pressure. If loosened excessively,

the ball check or relief valve can be ejected by the cylinder pressure.
NEVER loosen these parts more than a total of 2-1/2 turns. M187
B. Loosen the bleeder plug one-half to one full turn to allow the pressurized lubricant
to escape through the relief passage.
C. If lubricant does not appear, loosen the ball check (located under the lubrication
fitting) one-half to one full turn to allow the pressurized lubricant to escape through
the relief passage.
D. If lubricant still does not appear, use the following emergency method. Refer to
CAUTION note.
1. Unscrew ball check and/or relief valve an additional one and one-half to two
turns (2-1/2 total turns).
2. When the proper tension has been obtained. tighten the ball check and/or relief
valve to a torque of 45 to 50 Ib ft (61 to 68 Nm).
E. Replace valve shield.
Track Lubrication
Track rollers and idlers are lubricated at the factory with SAE 30 engine oil and sealed.
Lubricate track pivot every 100 hours and before storage to prevent seizure.
200
9-11422
201
TIRES/WHEELSITRACKS/SPACING/BALLAST _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
STEERING AXLE
Steering axles with tension rods must have a 1/4 inch (6 mm) clearance between the
axle pivot washers and the pivot support. When the steering axle is level, connect and
adjust the axle tension rods. Be certain that the steering tires clear the tension rods at
full turn.
See Steering Wheel Tread Positions Page 192 in this manual for steering axle width
adjustment.
Toe-In
Check the toe-in with the combine on level ground and the steering wheels in the
straight position.
Measure the distance between the steering wheels at the forward edge of the wheels,
level with the hub cap. Measure the same distance at the rear edge of the wheels.
Compare the measurements for toe-in. The wheels must be closer to the front. Adjust
the length of the tie rod so that the toe-in is as follows:
16 and 16.1 Inch Wheels ........................................... 9/32 to 3/8 Inch (7 to 10 mm)
24 Inch Wheels ..................................................... 7/16 to 19/32 Inch (11 to 15 mm)
Power Guide Wheels .................................................... 1/4 to 3/8 Inch (6 to 10 mm)
201
9-11422
202
Wide Adjustable Axle
194L7
WIDE ADJUSTABLE AXLE

A package containing a hose clamp and hardware is supplied with each combine
equipped with the wide adjustable steering axle. When the wheel tread is set to a width
of 120 inch (3 048 mm) or wider, install the hose clamp on the steering axle to support
the steering cylinder hoses.
The retaining bolt with the flat washer goes through the hose clamp and into the
second axle adjustment hole to the left of center. Install the lock washer and nut to
hold the hose clamp in place.
202
9-11422
TIRESIWHEELSrrRACKS/SPACING/BALLAST _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 203
Pivot Support Positions
The combine steering axle pivot support is adjusted for the tire and axle combination
installed at the factory. The axle pivot support must be changed to level the combine
when the tire size combination or the drive axle clearance has been changed.
The steering axle pivot support can be installed in four different positions. The four
positions are as follows:
.........- FRONT OF COMBINE

POSITION 1 POSITION 2
tffl- ~
~
1~
~ ~~~;;JT
POSITION 3 POSITION 4
1S0l8
203
9-11422
204
TIRES/WHEELSfTRACKS/SPACING/BALLAST _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Change the position of the pivot support for the drive tire and steering tire combina-
tions as listed in the charts below.
Corn and Grain Combine
STEERING DRIVE WHEEL SIZE/AXLE CLEARANCE
WHEEL 23.1-26 23.1-26 28L-26 28L-26 24.5-32 24.5-32
TIRE LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH
SIZE R1 R3 R1 R3 R1 R2 R3 R1 R2 R3 R1 R2 R3 R1 R2 R3
11.00-16 F2 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 2 3 2 4 4 3
11.2-24 R1 - - 1 1 - - - 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 2
12.4-16 R3 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 3 3 2 3 3 2 4 4 4
14.9-24 R1 - - - - - 1 - - - - - - - - - -
16.9-26 R1 - - - - 1 1 - 2 3 - 3 3 - 4 4 -
16.9-26 R2 - - - - 1 1 - 2 2 - 3 2 - 4 4 -
18.4-16.1 R1 - -- - - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 2
18.4-26 R1 - - - - 1 1 - 2 2 - 2 2 - 4 3 -
18.4-26 R2 - - - - 1 1 - 1 2 - 2 2 - 4 3 -
WHEEL 30.5L-32 30.5L-32 67 X 34 -30 67 X 34-30 18.4-38 18.4-38
TIRE LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH
SIZE R1 R2 R3 R1 R2 R3 R2 R2 R1 R2 R1 R2
11.00-16 F2 2 3 2 4 4 3 2 4 2 3 4 4
11.2-24 R1 1 2 1 2 3 2 1 2 1 2 2 3
12.4-16 R3 3 3 2 4 4 4 2 4 3 3 4 4
14.9-24 R1 - 1* - - - - - - - 1 - -
16.9-26 R1 3 3 - 4 4 - 2 4 3 3 4 4
16.9-26 R2 3 3 - 4 4 - 2 3 3 3 4 4
18.4-16.1 R1 1 2 1 3 3 2 1 2 1 2 3 3
18.4-26 R1 2 3 - 4 4 - 2 3 2 2 4 4
18.4-26 R2 2 3 - 3 4 - 2 3 2 2 3 3
*If interference with power guide valve pin in Position 2.
Rice Combine
WHEEL 18.4-38 24.5-32 28L-26 30.5L-32 67 X 34-30 TRACK
TIRE HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH
SIZE R2 R2 R2 R2 R2
11.2-24 R1 3 3 1 3 2 4
14.9-24 R1 2 2 1 2 1 4
16.9-26 R1 4 4 3 4 4 4
16.9-26 R2 4 4 2 4 3 4
18.4-16.1 R1 3 3 1 3 2 4
18.4-26 R1 4 3 2 4 3 4
18.4-26 R2 3 3 2 4 3 4
204
9-11422
TIRES/WHEELsrrRAcKs/sPACING/BALLAST _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 205
POWER GUIDE WHEEL DRIVE (If Equipped)

Hydraulic Wheel Motor Type
The hydraulic rear wheel drive provides additional propulsion for extreme operating
conditions (mud) and assistance to steering. This is accomplished by directing oil
flow from the hydrostatic drive high pressure tubes through a directional control valve
to a hydraulic motor in each rear wheel. The control valve provides a positraction
effect in both forward and reverse.
REVERSE HIGH
PRESSURE
FORWARD
HIGH PRESSURE
/WHEEL MOTOR
WHEEL MOTOR DRIVE CIRCUITRY 155L.B
When the Power Guide Wheel Drive is engaged, the amount of wheel torque obtained
is strictly a function of hydrostatic pressure. The higher gear selection you have the
higher your hydrostatic system pressure will be. For this reason, you will actually get a
higher percentage of power assist from the Power Guide Wheel Drive in the higher
gear ranges.
205
9-11422
206
It is best to use your Power Guide Wheel Drive at all times when you are working in the
field. You gain these advantages: first, you will be operating at lower system pressure,
extending the life of your main hydrostatic transmission and gear train; second, you
will have the improved steering obtained through powering the rear steerable wheels;
and finally, running at lower systems pressure will normally lower the hydrostatic oil
temperature.
The power guide wheel drive is engaged

by a switch on the console that energizes
the solenoid to activate the valve. The
drive may be engaged or disengaged at
any time. When engaged the ground
speed will decrease.
For operating the combine on roads, switch the Power Guide Wheel Drive OFF to
obtain higher road speeds. The wheel motors automatically free wheel when the
Power Guide Wheel Drive is turned OFF. There is no limit to the distance the machine
can be operated on the road.
The factory installed attachment is built at 108 inch (2 743 mm) tread center. If a larger
tread center is desired, see the following illustrations.
108 Inch (2743 mm) Tread Center 74L7.80
o o
o
(---STUB AXLE
120 Inch (3 048 mm) Tread Center 75L7.80
Move the stub axles, hose guides and steering cylinder bracket to the positions
shown for tread center required.
206
9-11422
207
TIRES/WHEELSfTRACKS/SPACING/BALLAST _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Planetary Gear Type

The hydraulic rear wheel drive provides additional propulsion for extreme operating
conditions (mud) and assistance to steering. This is accomplished by directing oil
flow from the hydrostatic drive high pressure tubes through a directional control valve
to a hydraulic motor coupled to a planetary gear assembly in each rear wheel. Flow
controls limit the flow to the rear wheels and prevent over speeding the motors. A
positraction valve assures that oil is supplied to each rear wheel motor.
SELECTOR -==~,1~..,..-n-
VALVE
REVERSE _ _ _ _ PRESSURE FLUID

VALVE ONE DIRECTION
--=--=- PRESSURE FLUID
\ ====
BOTH DIRECTIONS
RETURN FLUID
/WHEEL MOTOR
~============~~======~
~~~~~~t~~~~ 151 L8
FORWARD VALVE
PLANETARY GEAR DRIVE CIRCUITRY
The power guide wheel drive is engaged by a switch on the console that energizes the
solenoid to activate the valve. The drive may be engaged or disengaged at any time.
When engaged the ground speed will decrease.
NOTE: Use the power guide wheel drive only when required by field conditions.
Do not engage (switch ON) drive unless planetary gear assembly is

coupled (drive position). If engaged while uncoupled and the prop-
h ulsion control lever is in a forward or reverse position, the oil flow is
. . directed to the rear hydraulic motors and the combine will not move
or will move slowly. If the drive is then disengaged (switch OFF) all
oil flow is directed to the front motor and the combine will suddenly
move or speed up. M251
NOTE: The factory installed attachment is built at 108 inch tread. If 120 inch tread is
desired, the four steel tubes which are included and shipped in the tool box must be
installed.
207
9-11422
208
Planetary Gear Assembly

Each power driven guide wheel hub contains a planetary gear assembly, driven by
the external hydraulic wheel motor.
The planetary gear assembly includes a lockout to disengage the planetary gears.
When using guide wheel drive, the lockout must be in the engaged position (cap with
dimple facing out).
ENGAGED WHEEL HUB DISENGAGED WHEEL HUB
Engage or disengage the wheel hub planetary gear assembly by removing the two
bolts retaining the cap to the hub, turning the cap over and reinstalling the two bolts.
For operating the combine on roads, switch the Power Guide Wheel Drive OFF to
obtain higher road speeds and to reduce wear on the components. For operating on
roads 50 miles or more, you should switch the Power Guide Wheel Drive OFF and
DISENGAGE the drive hubs.
IMPORTANT: Never try to operate with hubs disengaged and with power guide wheel
drive switch ON. This could be harmful to the rear motors, cause heat and reduce
performance of the main transmission.
For towing the combine or trailering the combine with the guide wheels on the ground,
the lockouts must be in the disengaged pOSition (caps with dimple facing in).
208
9-11422
TIRES/WHEELSITRACKS/SPACING/BALLAST _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 209
STEERING AXLE WEIGHTS

With some grain headers and corn
heads, additional weight on the steering
axle is required for safe operation. The
steering axle weight bracket and 100
pound weights are available from your
Dealer. A maximum of 10 weights, 1000
Ib (454 kg), can be used.
The steering axle weight support bracket

is not recommended for use with the
narrow adjustable steering axle, 56 to 68
inch (1 422 to 1 727 mm), because of
interference between the bracket and the
tie rods and steering wheels.
The steering axle weight support bracket and weights cannot be used with power
guide axles.
CORN/GRAIN COMBINE (1)
POUNDS (kg) REQUIRED POUNDS (kg) REQUIRED

HEADER WITHOUT ROCK TRAP BEATER WITH ROCK TRAP BEATER
MODEL FEEDER LENGTH FEEDER LENGTH FEEDER LENGTH FEEDER LENGTH
47 INCH 54.5 INCH 47 INCH 54.5 INCH
(1 194 mm) (1384 mm) (1194 mm) (1384 mm)
1010
22.5 FT 0 0 0 0
(6.86 m)
GRAIN
1010
25FT 0 0 200LB 400LB
(7.62 m) (91 kg) (181 kg)
GRAIN
1020
22.5 FT 0 0 200 LB 600LB
(6.86 m) (91 kg) (272 kg)
GRAIN
1020
25 FT 0 200 LB 400 LB 800 LB
(7.62 m) (91 kg) (181 kg) (364 kg)
GRAIN
1064 0 0 0 200 LB
CORN (91 kg)
1083 0 200 LB 200 LB 400 LB
CORN (91 kg) (91 kg) (181 kg)
(1) Wrth standard tires and axle in low position.
209
9-11422
210
RICE COMBINE (1)
HEADER FEEDER LENGTH

MODEL 54.5 INCH (1 384 mm)
POUNDS (kg) REQUIRED POUNDS (kg) REQUIRED
WITHOUT ROCK TRAP BEATER WITH ROCK TRAP BEATER
1010
22.5 FT 0 200 LB
(6.86 m) (91 kg)
GRAIN
1010 600LB 800 LB

25 FT (272 kg) (363 kg)
(7.62 m)
GRAIN
1020 200LB 400 LB

22.5 FT (91 kg) (181 kg)
(6.86 m)
GRAIN
1020 800 LB 1000 LB

25 FT (363 kg) (454 kg)
(7.62 m)
GRAIN
1064 0 200 LB
CORN (91 kg)
1083 600 LB 800 LB
CORN (272 kg) (363 kg)
(1) With standard tires and axle in high position.
1'>.. Mixing solution and changing tires can be dangerous and should be
. . done by trained personnel. See your Dealer tor this service. M196
NOTE: If the combine is equipped with power guide wheel drive with hydraulic wheel
motors subtract 400 Ib (181 kg) from the weights shown in the charts and add calcium
chloride solution to the steering axle tires to obtain proper combine balance. If
additional traction is desired 75 percent fill in each 16.9 x 26 tire will provide 660lb (299
kg) and 800 Ib (362 kg) in each 18.4 x 26 tire. Do not exceed the 75 percent fill.
NOTE: If the combine is equipped with planetary gear power guide wheels the
steering axle weight bracket and weights are not required.
210
9-11422
LUBRICATION/FILTERS/FLUIDS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 211
SECTION INDEX
Air Induction System ................. 236-241 Fluid Levels ...............................219-220
Filter Cleaning ............................... 239 Lower Combine ............................ 220
Filter Identification ......................... 236 Upper Combine ............................ 219
Filter Installation .....................240-241
Filter Removal ........................ 237-238 Fuel System ...............................232-235
Filter Service ................................. 236 Air Removal .................................. 235
Inspection ..................................... 237 Conditioner ................................... 232
Service Interval ............................. 237 Filter Replacement... ..............233-234
Service Interval ............................. 233
Brake System ............................244-245 Specifications ............................... 232
Bleeding the Lines ........................ 245 Water Separator
Service Interval ............................. 244 Filter Replacement... ..................... 233
Cooling System .........................226-231 Grease Fittings .......................... 215-218

Coolant Solutions ......................... 228 Combine
Coolant System LH Side ..................................... 216
Filter Conditioner .......................... 229 Rear ........................................... 217
Draining Cooling System .............. 230 RH Side ..................................... 215
Filling Cooling System .................. 231 Upper ........................................ 218
Pressure System ........................... 226
Radiator Coolant Level ................. 227 Header Lift Filter. .............................. 248
Reservoir Coolant Level ............... 227
Service Interval ............................. 226 Hydraulic Oil ..................................... 246
Thermostat. ................................... 229 Oil Change .................................... 246
Oil Lever........................................ 247
Chain and Track Lubrication ............ 221 Service Interval ............................. 246
Engine Hourmeter ............................ 214 Operators Cab ..........................259-260

Air Filter..................................259-260
Engine Lubrication ....................222-225 Outside ...................................... 259
Engine Oil ..................................... 222 Recirculating ............................. 260
Engine Oil Change ....................... 224
Engine Oil Filters .......................... 225 Power Guide Wheels ........................ 252
Engine Oil Level... ......................... 223 HydrauliC Motor ............................ 252
Oil Viscosity .................................. 222 Planetary Gear Type
Service Interval ............................. 223 Oil Change ................................ 252
Oil Level .................................... 252
Feeder and Cleaning Service Interval .......................... 252
Fan Gear Case ................................. 254
Propulsion System
Final Drive ........................................ 243 Air Removal ........................... 249-251
Fluid Change ................................ 243 Hydraulic Motor ............................ 251
Fluid Level .................................... 243 Planetary Gear .............................. 250
Service Interval ............................. 243 With Power Guide Wheels ..... 250-251
211
9-11422
212
LUBRICATION/FILTERS/FLUIDS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
SECTION INDEX
Propulsion System (Continued)
Without Power Guide Wheels ....... 249
PTO Housing .................................... 253

Oil Change .................................... 253
Oil Level ........................................ 253
Rotor Gear Case .............................. 255

Fluid Change ................................ 255
Fluid Level .................................... 255
Shields and Side Panels .................. 213
Steering Wheel Bearing

Lubrication .................................257-258
Corn and Grain Combine ............. 257
Rice ............................................... 258
Straw Chopper ................................. 256

Fluid Change ................................ 256
Fluid Level .................................... 256
Transmission .................................... 242

Oil Change .................................... 242
Oil Level ........................................ 242
212
9-11422
213
SHIELDS AND SIDE PANELS

To do maintenance on the different combine systems the shields and side panels will
have to be removed.
Do not operate the combine without the shields and side panels covering drive
components.
h Rotating machine parts, stay clear, keep shields installed to help

. . protect from clothing entanglement and injury. Wear close-fitted
clothing. M124
213
9-11422
214
ENGINE HOURMETER
Service your combine at the intervals and locations given on the Lubrication Chart.
When you service your combine, use only high quality lubricants.
The engine hourmeter shows the amount of actual hours the combine engine has
worked. The first number to the right displays tenths of an hour and is a black number
on a white surface. The remaining numbers are white on black. Use the hourmeter
along with the lubrication chart to service your combine at the correct time periods.
214
9-11422
9-11422
223
Service Specifications
Oil Level Check Interval ......................................................................................Daily
Oil Change Interval... ................................................... Every 100 hours of operation

(See Note)
Oil Type ...................................................................... See Engine Oil in this manual
Oil Capacity - Without Filter Change ............................... 17 U.S. Quarts (16 Utres)
With Filter Change .................................... 20 U.S. Quarts (19 Utres)
NOTE: The engine crankcase drain period may be extended to every 200 hours of
operation if Case IH No. 1 Engine Oil is used.
Engine Oil Level

To check the engine oil level, put the combine on level ground and stop the engine.
Turn the dipstick handle counterclockwise and remove the dipstick. If the oil level is
below the ADD mark, add oil to raise the oil level to the FULL mark. Do not raise the oil
level above the FULL mark.
223
9-11422
224
Engine Oil Change

To change the engine oil, put the combine on level ground and stop the engine.
Change the engine oil as follows:
NOTE: For best results, change the oil while the engine is still warm from operation.
1. Place the end of the engine oil drain hose in a container.
2. Open the oil pan drain valve and drain the oil from the engine.
3. See ENGINE OIL FILTERS if the filters are to be changed.
4. Put the correct type and amount of new oil into the engine.
5. Start the engine and check the oil pressure gauge to see if the lubricating oil is
pressurized.
6. Inspect the engine oil filters for leaks.
224
9-11422
Engine Oil Filters

Change Interval ........................................................... Every 200 hours of operation
IMPORTANT: Change the oil filter at the recommended time interval. Your Dealer has
approved filters. Do not use other type filters.
Change the engine oil filters as follows:

1. Drain the oil from the engine.
2. Remove the two oil filters as shown above. Use a strap wrench, if necessary.
3. Apply clean oil to the gasket on the new filters.
4. Install the filters. Turn each filter until the gasket comes in contact with the filter
head. Tighten each filter an additional one half turn by hand.
5. Loosen each filter approximately one turn. Turn the filter again until the gasket
comes in contact with the filter head. Tighten each filter an additional one half to
three fourths of a tum by hand.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT use a filter wrench to install the oil filter. When the filter is too
tight you can cause damage to the gasket and filter.
6. Install new oil in the engine.
225
9-11422
226
COOLING SYSTEM
Reservoir Coolant Level Check Interval. ...................... Every 10 hours of operation.
Radiator Coolant Level Check Interval ...................... Every 250 hours of operation.
Check and Tighten Coolant Hose Clamps ................. Every 250 Hours of operation
Coolant Filter Change Interval .................................... After the first 100 hours, then
every 400 hours of operation.
Coolant System Change Interval ...................................................... Every two years
Coolant Conditioner Change IntervaL ........................ Anytime coolant is changed.
Coolant Capacity ........................................................... 34 U.S. Quarts (32.2 Litres).
Thermostat .................................................................... 180°F to 20~F (82 to 94°C)
Radiator Cap ....... ,............................................................................... 9 PSI (62 kPa)
Pressure Cooling System

Hot coolant can spray out if radiator cap is removed while system is
h hot. To remove radiator cap, let system cool, turn to first notch, then
.4tA wait until all pressure is released. Scalding can result from fast re-
moval of radiator cap. M141 B
1. The pressure cap on a pressure

cooling system has a control valve
that operates as a SAFETY RELIEF
VALVE to keep the pressure within the
system operating range. Operating
the engine without a pressure cap or
with a pressure cap that has a control
valve that is not set to operate at the
correct pressure, can cause damage.
2. A pressure cooling system decreases
the loss of coolant caused by
evaporation or bOiling. The system
must have good seals at the radiator cap, hoses and hose connections. It is im-
portant that you stop ALL LEAKS OF ANY SIZE as soon as the leaks are found. A
small leak can become a large flow when pressure is increased in the cooling
system. While the combine is in operation, a weak hose can break and cause injury
or damage. Check all hoses and hose connections with frequency. KEEP HOSES,
HOSE CONNECTIONS AND PRESSURE CAP IN GOOD CONDITION.
226
9-11422
Reservoir Coolant Level
Check the coolant level in the coolant recovery reservoir every 10 hours of operation.
Check the coolant when the coolant is cold and the engine is stopped. DO NOT
remove the radiator cap. The coolant level must be within the normal cold range
marks on the reservoir. If the level is below the ADD mark, fill the reservoir to the top
mark of the normal cold range with the coolant solution specified in this manual.
Radiator Coolant Level
Check the coolant level in the radiator every 250 hours of operation. Check the coolant
when the coolant is cold and the engine is stopped. The radiator must be full to the
bottom of the filler neck. If coolant must be added to the radiator, follow the procedure
in this manual.
NOTE: If the radiator coolant level is low and the reseNoir coolant level is above the
ADD mark, check for air leaks in the hose between the radiator and coolant reseNoir.
227
9-11422
228
Coolant Solutions
Combines shipped in North America have the cooling systems filled with a 50 percent
mixture of water and Ethylene Glycol solution.
FOR HOT WEATHER OPERATION - Use a solution of water and Cooling System
Treatment, Part Number 331-509 in the cooling system. The boiling point of antifreeze
solutions is higher than water, but the ability to transfer heat is less. As a result, during
hot weather operation, the engine will run cooler with a solution of water and Cooling
System Treatment in the cooling system. Never use water alone. The addition of
Cooling System Treatment helps protect the cooling system and cylinder sleeves
against corrosion, deposit formation, chemical attack and cavitation erosion.
IMPORTANT: Change the coolant solution every two years as recommended in this
manual. The heat generated by the diesel engine causes a natural change in the
inhibitors in the coolant which results in loss of corrosion protection. The loss of the
inhibitors may cause water pump cavitation and cylinder block erosion.
Except for hot weather operation, install only Ethylene Glycol coolant solution in the
cooling system. Use a good quality, high boiling point, Ethylene Glycol that does not
have any additives to stop leaks. Do not install any rust inhibitors that are not
approved. It is possible that the rust inhibitors and Ethylene Glycol will not mix and
work against each other to decrease corrosion protection, form deposits in the
cooling system and cause damage to the cooling system and the radiator.
Do not use a low boiling paint. alcohol type coolant solution. Because the boiling point
of alcohol is below the combine minimum operating temperature, loss of coolant from
evaporation can be too much.
IMPORTANT: When using Ethylene Glycol coolant solutions, always have a minimum
of 50 percent Ethylene Glycol coolant in the cooling system. Do not install more than
50 percent Ethylene Glycol in the coaling system unless the ambient air temperature
will be less than -34°F (-36°C). More than 50 percent Ethylene Glycol decreases heat
transfer and will cause the engine surface temperature to be more than normal.
228
9-11422
229
Coolant System Filter Conditioner

The cooling system filter contains an
element which filters the coolant and
provides chemicals to condition the
coolant.
To maintain protection of the cooling

system from corrosion, deposit
formations, chemical attack and
cavitation erosion of cylinder sleeves the
coolant filter conditoner must be
changed after the first 100 hours, and
every 400 hours of operation thereafter.
Whenever the cooling system is drained and refilled, the coolant must be treated with
Case Cooling System treatment, Part Number 331-509. The coolant filter must also
be replaced. This will assure that the chemical concentration is returned to the same
level as before draining the system. Changing only the filter will not provide adequate
chemicals.
NOTE: Adding coolant "Stop Leak" to the cooling system will cause premature
plugging of the filter.
h Hot coolant can spray under pressure. Close valves before

~ removing filter. M153
Thermostat
NOTE: Do not operate the combine without a thermostat or with a defective
thermostat. The engine can run too hot or cold causing possible engine damage.
229
9-11422
230
Draining the Cooling System
IMPORTANT: Never put coolant in a hot

engine because the difference in
temperature between the metal and the
coolant can cause cracks.
Clean the cooling system each time the

coolant is changed. Clean the system as
follows:
1. When the coolant is hot, open the
radiator drain valve, and remove the
engine block drain plug and the oil
cooler drain plug. Close the drain
valves and install the plugs after the system is empty.
2. Install a good type of radiator cleaner and fill the system with clean water. Follow
the instructions given with the radiator cleaner.
3. Remove the radiator cleaner solution. Flush the system with clean water.
230
9-11422
231
Filling The Cooling System

To fill the cooling system. be sure all drains are closed.
4. Fill the cooling system with the coolant solution specified in this manual. Install
coolant system treatment.
Fill the radiator slowly (which allows air to escape) to the top of the filler neck below the
overflow.
5. Check the hoses. radiator. pump and water manifold for leaks.
Fill the coolant recovery reservoir to the hot FULL mark. Filling to this level allows air
trapped in the engine to escape. After the system has been brought up to temperature
and stabilized. add make-up coolant to bring level to the ADD mark on the coolant
recovery reservoir when cold.
NOTE: After the cooling system is completely filled, run the engine for approximately
five minutes to remove all air from the system. Check the coolant level and add coolant
if needed.
NOTE: Never pour coolant into the radiator if the engine is very hot or you can cause
damage to the engine, fill only through the coolant recovery reseNoir.
231
9-11422
232
LUBRICATION/FILTERS/FLUIDS
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel System
The fuel system on your combine has a 92-1/2 U.S.Galion (350 Litre) fuel tank. water
separator filter. fuel filters and fuel injection parts. To prevent dirt and water from
reaching the injection parts. which will cause damage and decrease performance.
use clean fuel. drain the water separator filter at regular intervals and service the fuel
filters.
FOR THE PROTECTION OF YOUR FUEL SYSTEM - GET CLEAN FUEL AND KEEP
THE FUEL CLEAN.
Diesel Fuel Specifications

Use a good grade of Number two Diesel Fuel in your engine. Do not use other types or
grades of fuel. The use of other fuels will result in loss of engine power and high fuel
consumption.
NOTE: When the temperature is very cold, the use of a mixture of Number one and
Number two Diesel Fuel is permitted for a short period of time. See your fuel dealer for
winter fuel requirements in your area.
Specifications For Acceptable

Number Two Diesel Fuel
A.P.1. Gravity (Min) ................................................................................................. 34
Flash Point, (Min) ................................................................................... 140°F (60°C)
Cloud Point rNax Appearance Point)(Max) .............................................. -5°F (-2°C)
Pour Point. (Max) .................................................................................. -15°F (-26°C)
Distillation Temperature. 90% Point.. ............................ 540 to 640°F (282 to 338°C)
Viscosity. at 100°F (38°C)
Centistokes .............................................................................................. 2.0 to 4.3
Saybolt Seconds Universal ....................................................................... 32 to 40
Cetane Number (Min) ............................... .43 (45 to 55 for winter or high altitudes)
Water and Sediment By Volume (Max) .................................................... 0.05 of 1%
Sulfur. by weight (Max) ............................................................................. 0.50 of 1%
Copper Strip Corrosion (Max) ............................................................................No. 2
Ash. By Weight (Max) ............................................................................... 0.01 of 1%
Fuel Conditioner
Diesel Fuel Conditioner is available from your Dealer. Instructions for the use of the
fuel conditioner is on the container.
The use of Diesel Fuel Conditioner will:

1. Clean fuel injectors. valves and manifolds for increased service life.
2. Disperse insoluble gummy depOSits that can form in the fuel system.
3. Separate moisture from the fuel.
4. Stabilize fuel in storage.
232
9-11422
233
Fuel System Service Intervals
Water Separator Filter ..................................... Drain water every 10 hours. Replace

when a loss of horsepower occurs.
Primary and Secondary Filter .............................. Replace every 500 hours or when
loss of horsepower occurs.
Water Separator Filter Replacement
Close the fuel tank shutoff valve. Remove the water separator filter with a clamp type
filter wrench. Lubricate the new filter gasket with a small amount of clean oil or grease.
Install the filter. Open the fuel tank shutoff valve. To remove air from the system see
"Air Removal" in this manual.
IMPORTANT: Turn the filter clockwise until the filter gasket comes in contact with the
filter head. Use your hand to tighten 1/2 of a tum. To get the correct seal, loosen the
filter and again tighten 1/2 to 3/4 of a turn after the gasket comes in contact with the
filter head. When the filter is too tight, you can cause damage to the gasket and filter.
Fuel Filter Replacement
Turn the fuel shutoff valve clockwise to Clean the filter head, filters and engine
stop the fuel. area next to the filters.
233
9-11422
234
IMPORTANT: Tum the filters clockwise

until the filter gasket comes in contact
with the filter head. Use your hand to
tighten 1/2 of a tum. To get the correct
seal, loosen the filters and again tighten
1/2 to 3/4 of a tum after the gasket comes
in contact with the filter head. When the
filters are too tight, you can cause
damage to the gaskets and filters.
STEP 6
Turn each filter counterclockwise to Fill the fuel tank and remove air from the
remove. Use a clamp wrench if required. fuel system.
NOTE: If the engine does not have power

with a full load after you have done the
filter seNice and removed the air from the
system, see your Dealer to find and
correct the cause.
Apply clean oil or grease to the gasket on

the new filters.
NOTE: Do not fill the new filters with fuel

before installation.
Install the filters.

234
9-11422
235
Fuel System Air Removal

Air must be removed from the fuel system. Air can enter the fuel system under the fol-
lowing conditions:
1. The fuel tank has no fuel.
2. Fuel system parts are removed for service or repairs.
3. The combine is in storage for a long period of time.
NOTE: If the combine has no fuel, it is possible to put fuel in the tank and start the
engine without dOing the air removal procedure. However, a small amount of air can be
in the filters and injection pump. Air in the system will cause loss of power and engine
stall when a load is applied.
Open the fuel tank shutoff valve. If the fuel Loosen the nut on the fuel injection pump
tank is more than half full remove the plug supply line at the secondary filter. Unlock
on top of the water separator filter base the plunger of the hand primer pump.
until fuel with no air bubbles is seen. Pump the primer until fuel with no air
Replace the plug. If the fuel tank is less bubbles is seen. Tighten the supply line
than half full remove the side plug until nut. Pump the primer for 50 strokes. Lock
fuel with no air bubbles is seen. Replace the primer plunger in place. Start the
the plug. engine and check for fuel leaks around
the filters, lines and fittings.
h Never refuel the machine when the engine is hot or running. Never
. . smoke while refueling. M139B
235
9-11422
236
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM

Air Cleaner Service Indicator
The air cleaner service indicator shows
when the primary filter element needs
service. Service the primary filter when
the service indicator shows an air
restriction of 25 inches of water (6.20
kPa) or when the service window has a
red signal. If either of these conditions
occur during the work day, you can
service the elements after the days work
is done.
After servicing the filter elements, reset A1904

the indicator by pushing up on the reset
button at the bottom of the indicator. The
red signal disappears when the indicator
is reset.
Air Filter
Your combine is equipped with a two-stage air filter system consisting of a primary
(outer) filter and a secondary (inner) filter.
The primary filter is a high capacity filter PRIMARY

designed to provide optimum protection
to the engine. The primary filter can be
cleaned or washed as required between
filter changes. See Air Filter Service for
more information.
The secondary (inner) filter gives extra

protection to the engine if there is
damage to the primary filter. The secon-
dary filter cannot be cleaned or washed.
Replace the filter if the filter has damage T93753
or is dirty.
236
9-11422
Inspection
To prevent the entrance of dirt into the engine, it is absolutely essential that frequent
inspection of the flexible rubber connections from air cleaner to the intake manifold be
made. Hose or flexible connections must be replaced before they deteriorate. To
eliminate any undue strain on the connections, make sure the pipes line up. See that
all joints between the air cleaner and intake manifold are tight; this includes hose
connections, manifold joints and gaskets.
All gaskets must be in good condition and all clamps drawn up tight.
Promptly replace a defective service indicator.
Maintenance and care of the air cleaning system which includes the filter elements is
the responsibility of the customer.
Air Filter Service

Filter Service Interval .......................................Clean When Service Indicator Shows
an air restriction of 25 inches of
Water (6.20 kPa) or Shows Red
Primary Filter Replacement Interval ................................................... Once a Year or

After Four (4) Cleanings
Secondary Filter Service IntervaL .......................................................... Once a Year

Do Not Clean
Loosen the air cleaner cup retaining Remove the air cleaner cup from the air
clamp. cleaner housing. Remove the primary
filter element retaining wing nut from the
mounting stud.
237
9-11422
238
LUBRICATION/FILTERS/FLUIDS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _--,....._ __
Remove the primary filter element. Do not Remove and discard the secondary filter
let dirt fall on the secondary filter element. element from the air cleaner housing.
Remove the secondary (inner) filter Clean the inside of the air cleaner cup.
element retaining wing nut from the
mounting stud.
NOTE: Do not remove the secondary

(inner) element unless the secondary
element is to be replaced.
Clean the inside of the air cleaner body.
238
9-11422
Cleaning Primary Air Filter
37L7
If most of the dirt is dry, clean the element Keep the filter element in solution for one
with compressed air put into the inside of hour and then, turn the filter in solution for
the element to the outside. Keep the air approximately two minutes. Remove the
nozzle about five inches (127 mm) from filter from the solution and wash the filter
the element and move the nozzle up and element with water until the water used is
down while turning the element. clear of dirt. Use a water hose without a
nozzle and flush from the inside of the
IMPORTANT: The nozzle pressure must element to the outside.
not be more than 35 PSI (241 kPa).
IMPORTANT: The water pressure must
NOTE: Do not use the compressed air not be more than 35 PSI (241 kPa). Let the
method of element cleaning if the dirt has element dry completely before installa-
oil or soot. tion. It is best to have a second filter to
install in the combine while the cleaned
STEP 9 filter is drying.
NOTE: Replace the primary element after

the element has been cleaned four times.
35L7.35
If the dirt is wet or heavy, put the element

in a solution of Case IH Filter Element
Cleaner, Part Number A4091 0 and water.
Mix two ounces (56.7 grams) of cleaner
to one gallon (3.8Iitres) of water at a tem-
perature of approximately 100°F (38°C).
239
9-11422
240 _ _ __
LUBRICATION/FILTERS/FLUIDS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Primary Air Filter Inspection
Install the air cleaner secondary filter

element retaining wing nut on the
To check the clean element for damage mounting stud.
or holes, put a lamp inside the element STEP
and turn the lamp. Visually check the
rubber gasket for damage. Check the
metal cover and filter material for
damage. Replace an element that has
damage.
Air Filter Installation
Install the air cleaner primary filter

element.
The air cleaner secondary filter element

must be replaced after one year of
service. Do not clean the element. Install
a new secondary element, if the element
is to be replaced.
Install the air cleaner primary filter

element retaining wing nut on the
mounting stud.
240
9-11422
241
Install the o-ring on the air cleaner Once the air cleaner elements are in
housing. place, press down on the air restriction
indicator cap to reset the indicator.
Install the air cleaner cup on the air

cleaner housing and tighten the clamp
After the primary element has been replaced or properly cleaned and installed,
operate the engine at high idle. If the air cleaner service indicator returns to red, stop
the engine and proceed as follows:
Reset the air cleaner service indicator and replace primary filter element. Operate the
machine at high idle or near a full load condition. If the indicator again turns red, shut
off engine and replace the secondary element. If the problem still perSists, check the
air cleaner service indicator. If it is defective, it must be replaced.
241
9-11422
242
TRANSMISSION
Oil Level Check Interval ............................................................................. 100 hours
Oil Change IntervaL ................................................................................ Once a year
Oil Capacity .................................................................... 20 U.S. Quarts (18.9 Litres)
Oil Type ........................................................................... CASE IH HY-TRAN® PLUS
Transmission Oil Level

To check the transmission fluid level, put the combine on level ground. Remove the fill
plug and check the fluid level. If the fluid level is low, add the recommended type
through the fill hole until the fluid level is even with the bottom of the hole. Install the
plug.
Transmission Oil Change

To change the transmission fluid, put the combine on level ground. Remove the drain
plug located on the bottom of the transmission housing. For best results, drain the
fluid when the fluid is warm. Install the drain plug. Add the recommended fluid type
through the fill hole until the fluid level is even with the bottom edge of the hole. Wait
approximately 5 minutes. Check the fluid level again and add fluid as necessary.
Install the fill plug.
242
9-11422
FINAL DRIVE
Check and Change
Fluid Level Check Interval ........................................... Every 100 hours of operation
Fluid Change Interval ............................................................................. Once a year
Fluid Type ............................................................... CASE IH HY-TRAN® PLUS Fluid
Fluid Capacity ................................................................ 13 U.S. Quarts (12.3 Litres)
To check the final drive fluid level, put the

combine on level ground. Remove the fill
and level plug located on the front of
each final drive housing. If the fluid level
is low, add the recommended fluid to
raise the fluid level to the bottom edge of
the fill hole. Install the plug.
To change the final drive fluid, put the

combine on level ground. Remove the
drain plug located on the bottom of each
final drive housing and drain the fluid. For
best results, drain the fluid when the fluid
is warm. Install the drain plugs. Add the
recommended fluid through the fill hole
until the fluid level is even with the bottom
edge of the hole. Install the fill and level
plugs.
243
9-11422
244
BRAKE SYSTEM
Brake Fluid Level Check Interval .................................. Every 50 hours of operation
Brake Fluid Change Interval.. ............................................................ Every two years
Brake Reservoir Capacity.....................................................................6 oz (177 mL)
Brake Fluid Type ........................................................................ SAE J1703 (DOT 3)
NOTE: When removing the brake reservoir filler cap, extreme care must be used to
prevent dirt from entering the reservoir.
Check the reservoir after every 50 hours of operation for the correct fluid level. Fluid
must be maintained at the maximum fluid level mark. Do not fill the reservoir to the top.
Brake fluids tend to absorb moisture. Moisture contamination can cause fluid
properties to deteriorate and may cause corrosion of brake cylinder bores and
pistons. It is recommended that the brake fluid be changed every two years.
Use only brake fluid meeting SAE J1703 (DOT 3) in brake master
A cylinder. Use of incorrect oils or fluids will cause damage to seals
resulting in potential brake failure and possible personal injury.
M160
244
9-11422
245
Bleeding the Brake Lines
WHEEL ~NG
Any air inside the hydraulic brake system
must be removed. Whenever a line has
cru~ 2 RET~NER
been disconnected in the system, the
entire system must be bled of air.
Fill the brake reservoir with SAE J1703

(DOT 3) brake fluid and see that it is kept
at least half full during the entire bleeding
operation.
148L8
1. Attach a 1/4 inch 10 drain tube to the highest bleeder valve on the RH brake
cylinder. Put the end of the drain tube into a container.
2. Open the bleeder valve 1/4 to 1/2 turn. Press the RH brake pedal down and hold.
Close the bleeder valve and release the pedal. Do not release the pedal until the
bleeder valve is closed.
3. Repeat Step 2 until all air is removed.
4. Repeat Steps 1, 2 and 3 for the LH brake cylinder.
5. Next, press the LH brake pedal halfway down and hold. Open the bleeder valve for
the LH brake cylinder, 1/4 to 1/2 turn. Press the RH brake pedal down and close the
bleeder valve. Release the RH brake pedal only.
6. Keep the LH brake pedal half way down and repeat Step 5 until all air is removed.
7. Close the bleeder valve and release the brake pedals.
245
9-11422
246
HYDRAULIC OIL
Oil Level Check Interval ........................................................Every 10 hours or Daily
Clean Reservoir Breather ................................................................. Every 100 hours
Clean The Filter Screens ........................ Every Filter Change (Prior to P.I.N. 26948)
Clean or Replace the Filter Screens ............................. Required when a Change in
Performance Occurs (P.I.N. 26948 and after)
Reservoir Capacity ............................................................ 5 U.S. Gallons (19 Litres)
Oil Type ........................................................................... CASE IH HY-TRAN® PLUS
NOTE: Change the hydraulic oil filter at the first 25 hours, at 100 hours and every 300
hours thereafter or once a year.
Oil Filter Change IntervaL ................................................................ Every 300 hours
To check the hydraulic fluid level, put the combine on level ground with the header
down. If the bottom sight glass is full, the reservoir has enough fluid. If more fluid is
needed, remove the breather cap and add enough fluid to be visible in the upper sight
glass.
Hydraulic Filter
Change the hydraulic oil filter as follows:
1. Drain the reservoir by removing the drain cap from the drain line.
2. Clean top of reservoir.
3. Remove wing nuts and reservoir cover.
4. Replace the old filter and clean the filter screen.
5. Install the drain cap.
6. Install new filter and the filter screen.
246
9-11422
247
7. Install the reservoir cover and wing nuts.
8. Add 5 U.S. gallons (19 Litres) of CASE IH HY-TRAN® PLUS to the reservoir and
inspect the fluid level.
After any service that requires draining the hydraulic reservoir, the following
procedure must be followed:
1. Put the transmission shift lever in neutral.
2. Start the engine and set engine speed at 1800 RPM.
3. Slowly move the propulsion control lever from full forward to full reverse six times.
Maintain the correct fluid level in the reservoir.
After servicing the hydraulic system where hydraulic components or hydraulic lines
were replaced see "Propulsion System Air Removal".
IMPORTANT: Operating the combine with the hydraulic cylinders at full stroke or in an
overload condition will cause the pressure relief valves to open and overheat the
hydraulic fluid. Do not overload the hydraulic system for more than 10 seconds.
247
9-11422
248
HEADER LIFT FILTER

(Prior to P.I.N. 26948)
Oil Filter Change IntervaL .................................................... Every 300 hours, when
the hydraulic filter is changed.
The header lift filter is located on the hyd-
raulic valves, in the hydraulic compart-
ment next to the cab.
NOTE: The filter must be replaced after

the first 100 hours of operation and then
use the regular change interval. The filter
must be changed when there is a failure
in the hydraulic system, which will cause
contamination.
Header Lift Filter

(P.I.N. 26948 and After)
The header lift filter is located on the hyd-
raulic valves in the hydraulic compart-
ment next to the cab.
NOTE: The filter screen must be

cleaned if a change in performance
occurs. If the hydraulic pump and relief
valve is working but the header will not
raise, the filter screen must be cleaned.
The relief valve is located next to the

auxiliary hydraulic pump.
248
9-11422
249
PROPULSION SYSTEM AIR REMOVAL
Any servicing of the propulsion system that has removed or replaced hydraulic
system components or lines, will require removing air from the system. Use the
following procedure:
Combines without Power Guide Wheels
Block the drive wheels to prevent machine movement. Keep the hydraulic reservoir
fluid at the correct level. Bottom sight glass must be full. Stop the engine when adding
hydraulic fluid.
h Never operate the engine in a closed building. Proper ventilation is
. . required under all circumstances. M142
A Operate controls only when seated in the Operators seat.

M137
COMBINE ENGINE TRANSMISSION PROPULSION LENGTH

BRAKES RPM GEAR SHIFT CONTROL LEVER OF TIME
POSITION POSITION/ACTION
DISENGAGED 1800 NEUTRAL DISCONNECT CABLE 2

CLEVIS AT PUMP, MINUTES
LOOSEN FRICTION SPRING
DISENGAGED 2700 NEUTRAL CONNECT CABLE CLEVIS, 2

ADJUST FRICTION SPRING. MINUTES
MOVE LEVER 1/2 INCH IN FORWARD
DISENGAGED 2700 NEUTRAL MOVE LEVER 1/2 INCH 2

IN REVERSE MINUTES
DISENGAGED 1800 NEUTRAL SLOWLY MOVE REPEAT

LEVER FULL FORWARD 3 TIMES
TO FULL REVERSE
249
9-11422
250
Combines with Power Guide Wheels

Block the drive tires to prevent machine movement. Raise and block the power guide
wheels off the ground so that the wheels will rotate freely. Engage the power guide
wheel hubs on planetary power guide wheels. Keep the hydraulic reservoir fluid at the
correct level. Bottom sight glass must be full. Stop the engine when adding hydraulic
fluid.
Planetary Gear Power Guide Wheels
COMBINE ENGINE TRANSMISSION PROPULSION POWER GUIDE LENGTH
BRAKES RPM GEAR SHIFT CONTROL LEVER WHEEL SWITCH OF TIME
POSITION POSITION/ACTION POSITION
DISENGAGED 1800 NEUTRAL DISCONNECT CABLE ON 2

CLEVIS AT PUMP. MINUTES
LOOSEN FRICTION
SPRING
DISENGAGED 2700 NEUTRAL CONNECT CABLE OFF 2

CLEVIS. ADJUST MINUTES
FRICTION SPRING.
MOVE LEVER 1/2
INCH IN FORWARD
DISENGAGED 2700 NEUTRAL MOVE CONTROL OFF 2
LEVER 1/2 INCH MINUTES
IN REVERSE
ENGAGED* 2700 3RD GEAR** MOVE CONTROL ON 2

IN FORWARD
ENGAGED* 2700 3RD GEAR** MOVE CONTROL ON 2

IN REVERSE
ENGAGED 1800 NEUTRAL SLOWLY MOVE ON REPEAT

LEVER FULL 3 TIMES
FORWARD TO
FULL REVERSE
* Combine will move if brakes do not hold.

** Check guide wheels for correct direction of rotation.
250
9-11422
251
Hydraulic Motor Power Guide Wheels

COMBINE ENGINE TRANSMISSION PROPULSION POWER GUIDE LENGTH
BRAKES RPM GEAR SHIFT CONTROL LEVER WHEEL SWITCH OF TIME
POSITION POSITION/ACTION POSITION
DISENGAGED 1800 NEUTRAL DISCONNECT CABLE ON 3
CLEVIS AT PUMP, MINUTES
LOOSEN FRICTION
SPRING
DISENGAGED 2700 NEUTRAL CONNECT CABLE OFF 2
CLEVIS, ADJUST MINUTES
FRICTION SPRING,
MOVE LEVER 1/2
INCH IN FORWARD
DISENGAGED 2700 NEUTRAL MOVE CONTROL OFF 2
IN REVERSE
DISENGAGED 2700 NEUTRAL MOVE CONTROL ON 30*
SEE NOTES LEVER 1/2 INCH SECONDS
1 AND 2 IN REVERSE MAXIMUM
ENGAGED** 1000 3RD GEAR*** MOVE CONTROL ON 15*
SEE NOTES LEVER 1/2 INCH SECONDS
2AND3 IN REVERSE MAXIMUM
ENGAGED** 2700 3RD GEAR*** MOVE CONTROL ON 4
IN FORWARD
ENGAGED** 2700 3RD GEAR*** MOVE CONTROL ON 4
IN REVERSE
ENGAGED** 1800 3RD GEAR 1/4 INCH ON 15
IN FORWARD SECONDS
ENGAGED** 1800 3RD GEAR 1/4 INCH ON 15
IN REVERSE SECONDS
* Check guide wheels for rotation and direction of rotation.
** Combine will move if brakes do not hold.
*** Check guide wheels for correct direction of rotation.
NOTE 1 Continue if the guide wheels do not rotate or if the guide wheels rotate in the reverse direction.
NOTE 2 If the guide wheels rotate in the forward direction see your Dealer for repair of the hydraulic system.
NOTE 3 If the guide wheels rotate in the reverse direction, continue the procedure. If the guide wheels
rotate in the forward direction see your Dealer for repair of the hydraulic system.
251
9-11422
252
POWER GUIDE WHEELS

Planetary Gear Power Guide
Oil Check Interval. ......................................................... Every 50 hours of operation
Oil Change Interval... .............................................................................. Once a year
Oil Capacity (Each Planetary} ............................................................ 1 Pint (473 ml)
Oil Type ......................................................................................... CASE IH 135 HEP
85W-140 Gear Lubricant
Planetary Oil Level

To check the planetary oil level, put the combine on level ground. Tum the wheel hub
until the oil fill/drain plug is at the top. Remove the oil level plug and check the oil level.
If the oil level is low, remove the fill plug and add the recommended oil type to raise the
oil level to the bottom of the oil level hole. Install both plugs.
Planetary Oil Change

To change the planetary oil, put the combine on level ground. Turn the wheel until the
oil fill/drain plug is at the bottom. Remove the plug and drain the oil. For best results
drain the oil when the oil is warm. Turn the wheel until the fill/drain plug is on the top.
Remove the level plug and add oil until the level is even with the bottom of the hole.
Wait approximately 5 minutes. Check the oil level again and add oil as necessary.
Install the plugs.
NOTE: Change the planetary oil after the first 50 hours of operation, and then use the
regular change interval.
Hydraulic Motor Power Guide

The outboard bearing of each wheel motor is lubricated with grease in a permanently
sealed cavity. The inboard bearing of each wheel motor is lubricated by the hydraulic
oil in the motor case; so no maintenance is required for either bearing.
252
9-11422
PTO HOUSING
Fluid Level Check Interval ............................................. Every 50 hours of operation
Fluid Change Interval .................................................. Every 500 hours of operation
Oil Type .................................................................. CASE IH HY-TRAN® PLUS Fluid
Oil Capacity .................................................................... 14 U.S. Quarts (13.2 Litres)
PTO Oil Level

To check the PTO housing oil level, put the combine on level ground. Check the fluid
level on the PTO dipstick. If the fluid level is at or below the ADD mark on the dipstick,
add the recommended fluid to the PTO to raise the fluid level to FULL mark. Add the
fluid through the fill tube.
PTO Oil Change

To change the PTO fluid, put the combine on level ground. Remove the drain cap from
the drain tube on the lower PTO housing and drain fluid. For best results, drain the
fluid when the fluid is warm. Install the drain cap and fill the PTO housing to the FULL
mark on the dipstick with the recommended fluid.
253
9-11422
254
FEEDER AND CLEANING FAN GEAR CASE

Oil Level Check Interval ................................................ Every 50 hours of operation
Oil Change Interval ...................................................... Every 500 hours of operation
Oil Capacity ................................................................... 2.75 U.S. Quarts (2.6 Litres)
Oil Type ................................................ CASE IH 135 HEP 85W-140 Gear Lubricant
Check Oil Level

To check the feeder and cleaning fan
gear case oil level, the combine must be
on level ground. The dipstick is located in
an access hole on the front of the grain
tank, next to the RH side of the operators
cab. If the oil level is at or below the "ADD"
mark on the dipstick, add the
recommended oil to raise the level to the
full mark.
Oil Change
To change the oil, put the combine on level ground. Remove the right hand separator
side panel. Remove the cap from the drain tube. For best results drain the oil when the
oil is warm. Install the cap on the drain tube and fill the gear case through the dipstick
tube.
254
9-11422
ROTOR GEAR CASE

Fluid Level Check Interval. ............................................ Every 50 hours of operation
Fluid Change Interval .................................................. Every 500 hours of operation
Fluid Capacity .................................................................... 4 U.S. Quarts (3.8 Litres)
Fluid Level
To check the fluid level put the combine
on level ground. Check the fluid level on
the dipstick. If the fluid level is at or below
the ADD mark on the dipstick, add the
recommended fluid to the transmission
to raise the fluid level to the FULL mark.
Install the fluid through the fill tube.
Fluid Change
To change the fluid, put the combine on level ground. Remove the screws that hold
the dipstick tube in place. Lower the dipstick tube and drain the gear case fluid. Install
the dipstick tube in its proper location. Fill the gear case to the FULL mark on the
dipstick with the recommended fluid.
255
9-11422
256
STRAW CHOPPER (If Equipped)

Fluid Level Check Interval. ............................................ Every 50 hours of operation
Fluid Change Interval ................................................. Every 500 hours of operation.
Fluid Capacity ................................................................. 3.3 U.S. Quarts (3.1 Litres)
Gear Case Fluid Level

To check the chopper gear case oil level, put the combine on level ground. Remove
the level plug from the side of the gear case. If the fluid level is low, add the
recommended fluid type to raise the fluid level to the bottom edge of the level plug
hole.
Gear Case Fluid Change

To change the fluid, put the combine on level ground. Remove the drain plug on the
lower pulley side of the gear case. Install the drain plug. Add the recommended fluid
type through the fill plug on the top of the gear case to bring the fluid level up to the
bottom of the level plug hole.
256
9-11422
257
STEERING WHEEL BEARING LUBRICATION

Lubrication Interval ................................................................................. Once a year
1. Put the gear shift lever in NEUTRAL position and engage the park brake. Uft the
rear end of the combine until the steering wheels are above the ground. Put a
support under the steering axle. Remove the whee\.
2. Remove hub cap, cotter pin, slotted adjusting nut and thrust washer.
3. Remove the outer bearing cone and pull the wheel hub from the spindle. Bearing
cups, cone, seal retainer and the seal are in the wheel hub.
4. Remove the seal, seal retainer and inner bearing cone from the hUb.
5. Check the bearing cups, cones, seal retainer, dust shield and sea\. Replace
bearings or seals that have wear or damage. Clean the bearings, inside of the hub
and the spindle.
6. Pack the bearing cones with Case IH 251 H EP grease. Fill hub with grease.
Install the hub seal on the spindle with the metal face toward the inner bearing
cone. Install the inner bearing cone and seal retainer into the hub.
7. Install the cone in the hub. Install the outer hub assembly on the spindle.
8. Install the thrust washer and slotted adjusting nut. Carefully tighten nut against
thrust washer until the pressure of the nut causes tension when the hub and wheel
are turned. Loosen the nut 1/4 of a turn or until the next slot in the nut aligns with the
hole in the spindle. Check for lateral movement of the hub. If there is movement
tighten the nut until there is no lateral movement.
9. Keep the slotted adjusting nut in position with a new cotter pin. Fill the hub cap with
grease and install the hub cap. Install the wheel and lower the combine.
257
9-11422
258
Rice Combine
Lubrication Interval ................................................................................. Once a year
461L8
1. Put the gear shift lever in NEUTRAL position and engage the park brake. Lift the
rear end of the combine until the steering wheels are above the ground. Put a
support under the steering axle. Remove the wheel.
2. Remove hub cap, cotter pin, slotted adjusting nut and thrust washer.
3. Remove the outer bearing cone and pull the wheel hub from the spindle. Bearing
cups, cone, oil seal wear ring and the seal are in the wheel hub.
4. Remove the seal, seal wear ring and inner bearing cone from the hub.
5. Check the bearing cups, cones, and seal. Replace bearings or seals that have
wear or damage. Clean the bearings, inside of the hub and the spindle.
6. Pack the bearing cones with Case IH 251 H EP grease. Fill hub with grease.
Install the hub seal on the spindle with the metal face toward the inner bearing
cone. Install the inner bearing cone and oil seal wear ring into the hub.
7. Install the outer cone in the hub. Install the hub assembly on the spindle.
8. Install the thrust washer and slotted adjusting nut. Carefully tighten nut against
thrust washer until the pressure of the nut causes tension when the hub and wheel
are turned. Loosen the nut 1/4 of a tum or until the next slot in the nut aligns with the
hole in the spindle. Check for lateral movement of the hub. If there is movement
tighten the nut until there is no lateral movement.
9. Keep the slotted adjusting nut in position with a new cotter pin. Fill the hub cap with
grease and install the hub cap. Install the wheel and lower the combine.
258
9-11422
OPERATORS CAB
Outside Air Filter
The outside air filter must be cleaned. as required by operating conditions. to assure a
full flow of fresh air.
Conditions of high humidity and extreme dust require a more frequent cleaning of the
filter. Clean the filter at least every other day.
Unsnap the three filter retainer latches and remove the filter using the pull tab.
Either one of three methods can be used in cleaning the filter: tapping. compressed
air or water washing.
Tapping: After removing the filter. clean the filter by tapping it gently on a flat surface
with the dirty side down. being careful not to damage filter.
Compressed Air: Direct compressed air. at 35 PSI (241 kPa) maximum pressure.
through the filter from the back side. opposite the direction of the arrows on filter.
Cab air filters remove dust in the air, but are not capable of removing
chemicals used in spraying crops or in weed control. Many chemi-
cals used for these purposes are toxic when improperly used, and
A can be hazardous to operators and others in the area. Follow the in-
structions of manufacturers of both the equipment and the chemi-
cals regarding prohibitions against inhalation of dust or spray, per-
sonal hygiene practices, and other precautions noted by the man-
ufacturers. M108
259
9-11422
260
Water Washing: The filter can also be washed by soaking it in water and mild
nonsudsing detergent. Rinse until clean with water. Water pressure must not exceed
35 PSI (241 kPa).
NOTE: Filter must be thoroughly dry before reinstalling in the cab. Air dry only. Do not
use compressed air. Replace filter if damaged or if filter cannot be cleaned by
recommended methods.
Reinstall the filter and snap the three retainer latches to hold the filter in place.
Recirculation Air Filter
Remove the recirculation grille by removing the six fasteners. Remove the filter from
inside the grille.
Clean the filter as required by operating conditions. Use mild soap and water. Rinse
with clear water and squeeze out the excess.
Install the filter in the headliner recess. Press the grille over each fastener stud. Install
and tighten the fasteners to lock filter in place.
260
9-11422
261
MAINTENANCE/ADJUSTMENTS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
SECTION INDEX
Air Compressor Belt.. ................265-266 Concave (Continued)
Adjustment .................................... 266 Installation ..................................... 337
Installation ..................................... 265 Removal .................................336-337
Removal ........................................ 265
Cooling System ................................ 345
Alternator Belt ................................... 264 Cleaning ........................................ 345
Auger Bed Elevator Drive Belt.. ................... 300-302

Drive Gear Adjustment.. ............... 340 Adjustment. ................................... 302
Installation ..................................... 302
Auxiliary Pump Drive Belt.. ........ 277-280 Removal ................................. 300-302
Adjustment. ................................... 279
Installation ..................................... 279 Elevator Drive Slip Clutch ................ 308
Removal ................................. 277-278
Fan Belt - Engine ............................. 264
Brakes .......................................316-317
Adjustment. ............................316-317 Feeder Adjustments
Adjustable Strippers ..................... 328
Clean Grain Elevator Automatic Feeder Shutoff ............. 324
Conveyer Chain .........................311-312 Bypass Automatic
Adjustment. ............................ 311-312 Feeder Shutoff .............................. 325
Installation ..................................... 311 Cylinder Anchor Positions ............ 328
Removal ........................................ 311 Operational Checks ...................... 325
Perforated Feeder Bottom ............ 328
Clean Grain Elevator Drive Chain .... 310 Removal ........................................ 326
Adjustment. ................................... 310 Reverser Chain ............................. 329
Installation ..................................... 310
Removal .... ,................................... 310 Feeder Conveyer Chain ................... 315
Adjustment.. .................................. 315
Cleaning Fan .................................... 344 Installation ..................................... 315
Adjustment. ................................... 344 Removal ........................................ 315
Cleaning Fan Drive Belt ............ 295-297 Feeder Drive Belt ......................292-294
Adjustment.. ........................... 296-297 Adjustment... ..........................293-294
Installation ..................................... 296 Installation ..................................... 293
Removal ........................................ 295 Removal ........................................ 292
Cleaning Fan Jackshaft Belt ..... 298-299 Foot-N-Inch Pedal .....................322-323

Adjustment. ................................... 299 Adjustment. ............................ 322-323
Installation ..................................... 299
Removal .................................298-299 Feeder Reverser Drive Chain .... 313-314
Adjustment.. .................................. 314
Concave ....................................334-337 Installation ..................................... 313
Adjustment. ............................ 334-335 Removal ........................................ 313
261
9-11422
262
SECTION INDEX
Feeder Jackshaft Drive Belt... ... 290-291 Rotor Drive Belt.. .......................267-272
Adjustment. ...................................291 Adjustment. ................................... 271
Instaliation ..................................... 291 New Belt. ................................... 271
Removal ........................................ 290 Used Belt .................................. 272
Installation ..............................270-271
Gear Shift Cable ........................ 320-321 Removal .................................267-270
Adjustment. ............................320-321
Separator Belt ...........................273-276
Grain Tank Unloader Adjustment. ............................275-276
Drive Belt ...................................281-287 Installation ..............................274-275
Adjustment. ............................284-287 Removal .................................273-274
Installation ..............................283-284
Removal .................................281-283 Separator Drive ......................... 330-331
Jackshaft Limit Switch
Grain Tank Un loader Chain ............. 306 Adjustment .........................330-331
Adjustment. ................................... 306
Installation ..................................... 306 Straw Chopper
Removal ........................................ 306 Belt
Adjustment ................................ 305
Grates ........................................338-339 Installation ................................. 305
Installation ..................................... 339 Removal .................................... 305
Removal ........................................ 338 Concave Blade Replacement.. ..... 342
Rotor Blade Replacement.. .......... 343
Neutral Start Switch .......................... 323
Adjustment. ....... ,........................... 323 Straw Spreader
Belt. ............................................... 303
Propulsion Control Cable ..........318-319 Adjustment ................................ 304
Adjustment. ............................318-319 Installation ................................. 304
Removal .............................303-304
Rear Horizontal Auger Drive Chain .. 307 Drive Gear Compartment
Adjustment. ................................... 307 Cleaning ........................................ 341
Installation ..................................... 307
Removal ........................................ 307 Tailings Elevator
Conveyer Chain .........................309-310
Reel Pump Drive Belt.. ..............288-289 Adjustment. ............................309-310
Adjustment. ................................... 289 Installation ..................................... 309
Installation ..................................... 288 Removal ........................................ 309
Removal ........................................ 288
Tailings Elevator Drive Chain ........... 308
Rotor ..........................................332-333 Adjustment. ................................... 308
Impeller Blade............................... 332 Installation ..................................... 308
Blade Stiffener/Wear Strip ......... 332 Removal ........................................ 308
Replacement ............................. 333
262
9-11422
9-11422
265
AIR COMPRESSOR BELT

Belt Removal
389L8
Push the compressor and mounting
bracket toward the engine. Remove
compressor belt.
Belt Installation
Loosen the lock nut on the adjusting bolt.

Back out the adjusting bolt 1-1/2 to 2 inch
(38 to 51 mm).
With the compressor toward the engine,

install the belt in the outer groove on the
pulley.
bolts.
265
9-11422
266
Belt Adjustment
Turn the adjustment bolt clockwise to Tighten the three (3) bracket mounting
move the compressor away from the bolts.
engine.
STEP 6
CHECK HERE "=;;;L--=..,
386L8 Tighten the lock nut to secure the ad-

Check the belt tension between the fan justing bolt.
pulley and the compressor pulley.
The correct belt tension is:
A. 112 inch (13 mm) deflection with 25 Ib
(111 N) force or
B. 60 to 85 Ib (267 to 378 N) with a belt
tension gauge.
266
9-11422
267
ROTOR DRIVE BELT

Belt Removal
Start the engine. Move the separator drive switch to ON. Push the rotor switch to the
high speed position. This will move the belt to the outer edge of the drive pulley and
force the driven pulley apart.
STEP 2
Stop the engine. Remove the key from

the key switch.
Shift the two speed gear case to the

neutral position.
A DO NOT disassemble the torque sensing unit. Special tools are

required to prevent the torque sensing unit from coming apart under
tension and causing personal injury. See your Dealer. M190
267
9-11422
268
Assemble the compressor plate to the

torque sensing unit. Be sure to tighten the
flange lock nuts against the pulley.
T89941
Tighten the compressor plate nuts evenly
to remove all slack.
381L8
Loosen the four retaining bolts from the
two speed gearbox. Remove the belt
gauge and bracket, if equipped.
268
9-11422
MAINTENANCE/ADJUSTMENTS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 269
Loosen the gearbox adjusting nuts. Loosen the adjusting bolts and lower the
Move the gearbox all the way to the right. mounting bracket. Remove the speed
chain from the drive sprocket. Raise
mounting bracket to top of adjustment
slot and secure with one bolt.
Turn the rotor drive pulley by hand, at the

same time, roll the belt over and off of the
driven pulley. Move the gearbox all the
way to the left to give clearance between Disconnect the wire harness. Remove
the pulleys. the four retaining bolts and separate the
universal jOint from the drive coupling.
Move the drive shaft to the right in the
slot.
Remove the variable stop stud.

269
9-11422
270
Remove the rotor drive belt through the

opening between the drive coupling and
the motor mounting bracket.
NOTCHED
RING
Belt Installation
STEP 13
382LB
v - TRACK CAM TORQUE SLOT TRACK CAM TORQUE

SENSING UNIT SENSING UNIT
Check torque sensing unit for foreign material between the pulley halves and clean if
necessary. Foreign material will retard the adjustable pulley half, resulting in rotor belt
slippage.
270
9-11422
271
MAINTENANCE/ADJUSTMENTS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
STEP 16
TORQUE SENDING
COMPRESSOR PLATE
IInV-«L..:-=;''ff'!
Install a new belt following the above pro-

cedure in the reverse order. Rotate the
pulleys by hand to allow the belt to take a 219L7
set in the pulley groove. Install the compressor plate and bolts to
the torque sensing unit, Step 4.
Belt Adjustment - New Belt
Turn the nuts down evenly on the bolts

until the driven pulleys open and the cam
Check the position of the variable drive follower is 1/4 inch (6 mm) from the
pulley. The drive pulley must be in the bottom of the cam groove.
open position, operate the variable ad-
justing motor (slow speed) if necessary, Go to Step 19.
Step 1 and 2.
271
9-11422
272
Belt Adjustment - Used Belts

NOTE: As the belt stretches and wears,
readjustment is necessary when the gap
is less than 2-39164 inch (66.2 mm).
Check the position of the variable drive

pulley. The drive pulley must be in the
open position. operate the variable ad-
justing motor (slow speed) if necessary.
Step 1 and 2. Loosen the gear case retaining bolts.
Step 6. Move the gear case to the left
using the drawbolt. at the same time
rotate the pulleys by hand until the gap
between the pulleys is 2-39/64 inch (66.2
mm).
Shift the rotor gear case to the correct

gear range.
2-39/64 INCH (66 mm)
138LS.2S
Check the gap between the rotor driven

pulleys. The correct gap is 2-39/64 inch
(66.2 mm). To change the gap. shift the
rotor gear case to neutral. Step 3.
272
9-11422
273
SEPARATOR DRIVE BELT
.....
-
..... ..........
--_ DRIVEN PULLEY
--_.....
'""--.....-- .......... -.....'
SHIELD
-- ~ '""-)
..... ..-.
--@~ -
' -"-... TOP BELT --0
--..../ ", SUPPORT
_ _ DRIVE PULLEY
SHIELD
417L8
Belt Removal
Remove the driven pulley shield. Remove the top belt support.
273
9-11422
274
_ _ __
MAINTENANCE/ADJUSTMENTS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Remove the drive pulley shield. Remove the separator belt from the
pulleys.
Belt Installation
Remove the cotter and retaining pin from

the cylinder extension tube. Slide the ex-
tension tube down the cylinder rod. This
will provide slack in the belt. To install the belt, do Step 1 through Step
6 in reverse.
Remove the belt guide.
274
9-11422
275
STEP 8
DRIVE PULLEY TRAP '-
~
SET TRAP AT
1/16TO 1/8
(2 TO 4 mm)
t 1
SEPARATOR BELT SUPPORT ROD
215L7
Set the drive pulley shield, Step 3 so that a clearance of 1/8 inch (3 mm) is between the
shield and the belt.
Belt Adjustment
T87664
The initial setting of the drive belt ad- Look through the window gauge to see
justing rod must be 3-1/4 inch (82 mm) the position of the block.
from the end of the rod to the top of the
flat washer.
Start the engine and move the separator

switch to ON.
275
9-11422
276
DIAGRAM A
INITIAL OR CORRECT ADJUSTMENT. EDGE
OF WINDOW OPENING IS EVEN WITH EDGE OF BLOCK.
WINDOW OPENING
BLOCK
UPPER NUT LOWER NUT
/'
~r-6--lI= == ==== = = =-= === 1-_-_-_-_-lL-..........................
= ........I
III = = = = = = -= =-= = = = =.. =~-::.=..:-:..:-=U-~=.!.I..:1!..j
DIAGRAM B 218L7
THE CORRECT ADJUSTMENT SHOWN.
PARTIAL WINDOW OPENING
WINDOW OPENING
217L7
DIAGRAM C
INCORRECT ADJUSTMENT. ADJUST
TO CONDITION A OR B.
WINDOW IS CLOSED
I
..........t,...-It::~~ :. -= = = = == -= -= ==::- = ==F-=1I--<h"T'T'l~~

~-r1~=r,=:1= ~.:: = = == = = = = ==-= - 1--4;.L.L..L:.L...L:.L:.J..:.C.i
If adjustment is necessary. do the following. 216L7

1. Move the separator switch to OFF.
2. Stop the engine and remove the key.
3. Loosen the lower nut on the adjusting rod 1/2 inch (13 mm).
4. Tighten the upper nut 1/2 inch (13 mm).
5. Adjust the belt so that the support rod is touching the belt.
6. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until the adjustment is correct.
276
9-11422
277
MAINTENANCE/ADJUSTMENTS~ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
AUXILIARY PUMP DRIVE BELT

Belt Removal
Remove the bolts that hold the auxiliary Loosen the nuts on the tension adjuster
hydraulic pump drive hub to the pump for the drive belt on the auxiliary hydraulic
drive pulley. pump jacks haft.
Loosen. but do not remove the upper bolt Pull the auxiliary hydraulic pump bracket
on the auxiliary hydraulic pump vertical back away from the pump drive pulley.
brace.
277
9-11422
278
STEP 7
Remove the auxiliary hydraulic pump

jacks haft drive belt from the jacks haft
driven pulley.
PTO SHAFT HYDROSTATIC PUMP
DRIVE SHAFT 206L7
Move the pump drive pulley outward on

the hydrostatic pump drive shaft.
Remove the three mounting bolts

holding the pump drive pulley to the PTO
shaft.
Remove the belt between the pump drive

pulley and the PTO shaft.
278
9-11422
MAINTENANCE/ADJUSTMENTS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 279
Belt Installation and Adjustment
Install the belt between the pump drive Install the auxiliary pump jackshaft drive
pulley and the PTO shaft. belt on the driven pulley on the auxiliary
pump jackshaft.
STEP 10
Tighten the adjusting nuts on the auxiliary

pump drive belt tension pulley until the
PTO SHAFT HYDROSTATIC PUMP tension spring is the same length as the
DRIVE SHAFT 206L7
tube around the tension spring. Loosen
Move the pump drive pulley inward on the nut just so the tube is free to tum.
the hydrostatic pump drive shaft. Install Adjust the tension any time the gap
and tighten the three mounting bolts between the spacer and the adjusting nut
holding the pump drive pulley to the PTO is 11/16 inch (17.5 mm) or more.
shaft.
279
9-11422
280
Install and tighten the bolts that hold the Tighten the upper bolt on the auxiliary
auxiliary pump drive hub to the auxiliary hydraulic pump vertical brace.
pump drive pulley to a torque of 35 to 40
Ib ft (50 to 55 Nm).
280
9-11422
281
GRAIN TANK UNLOADER DRIVE BELT

Belt Removal
Remove the auxiliary pump drive belt Remove the nut that holds the un loader
from the hydraulic pump drive pulley. belt shield. Remove the shield from the
See Page 277 in this manual. shaft of the unloader belt tension pulley.
STEP 2
..... A· .. ··11··
232L8 ~~~'I')li~*4. . . . . .·• .
Loosen the nuts on the tension idler for Remove the upper belt guide from the
the unloader drive belt. unloader belt.
281
9-11422
282
Remove the unloader belt trap support Remove the mounting bolts for the
from the guide channel. unloader jackshaft bearing flanges
behind the un loader drive pulley.
Remove the unloader belt guide from the

combine. Remove the bearing flange bolts for the
unloader jackshaft at the sprocket.
Loosen the chain tension sprocket for the

unloader drive chain. Move the jackshaft assembly away from
the combine.
282
9-11422
283
Remove the unloader drive belt between

the jacks haft and the combine frame.
Install the unloader drive belt between Move the unloader jackshaft assembly
the combine frame and the jacks haft. into place at the support and combine
frame.
283
9-11422
284
Adjust the tension sprocket so that the

deflection of the chain when measured at
the center of the bottom strand is 1 inch
(25.4 mm).
Install the bearing flanges on the support

and combine frame.
Install the unloader belt trap support in

the upper belt guide channel.
Move the tension adjusting sprocket

against the chain.
284
9-11422
Install the un loader belt guide into

position around the unloader drive belt.
231L8
Measure the gap between the unloader
belt guide and the unloader jackshaft
driven pulley area. Adjust the belt guide
so that the gap measures 1/8 to 17/64
inch (3 to 7 mm) at all pOints within the
area shown.
231L8
driven pulley. Adjust the unloader belt
guide so that the gap measures 1/8 to
11/64 inch (3 to 4.3 mm) within the area
shown.
285
9-11422
286
Install the upper belt guide on the

support rod.
MEASURE GAP BElWEEN
PULLEY AND BELT GUIDE STEP 23
7/64 TO 1/8 INCH (2.8 TO 3.3 mm)
=-=."::-. SPRING
LENGTH
MUST BE
_-L.._ 7 INCH
(178 mm)
233L8.70

drive pulley. Adjust the belt guide so that 232L8
the gap measures 7/64 to 1/8 inch (2.8 to Adjust the nuts that control the length of
3.3 mm). After the gap has been correctly the unloader belt tension pulley return
adjusted at all points along the un loader spring. The return spring must be
belt guide, tighten all of the bolts that hold adjusted so that the spring length is 7
the unloader belt guide. inches (178 mm) when the unloader
control lever is in the engaged position.
286
9-11422
With the unloader drive control lever in Install and adjust the auxiliary pump drive
the disengaged position, set the belt on the hydraulic pump drive pulley.
unloader belt upper rod so that it just See Page 277 of this manual.
touches the inside of the unloader drive
belt.
Install the pulley shield on the shaft of the

unloader belt tension pulley. Install and
tighten the nut to the shaft.
287
9-11422
288 MAINTENANCE/ADJUSTMENTS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
REEL PUMP DRIVE BELT

Belt Removal
Remove the reel pump drive belt shield Remove the belt.
and the LH header jackshaft shield.
Installation
Loosen the six bolts in the hydraulic

pump bracket. Move the pump forward. Install a new belt. Move the reel pump
rearward until the belt is almost tight.
Tighten the six bolts in the hydraulic
pump bracket.
Loosen the two adjusting nuts on the

spring adjusting eye bolt.
288
9-11422
Adjustment
HYDRAULIC PUMP BRACKET
207L7
Measure the spring length from the Install LH header jackshaft shield and the
bottom of the top spring hook to the top hydraulic reel pump drive belt shield.
of the bottom spring hook. Turn the
upper adjusting nut on the eye bolt until
the spring length is 6 inch (152 mm).
Tighten the bottom adjusting nut. Belt
tension must be tight enough to prevent
the belt from slipping.
NOTE: Loosen the six bolts in the hyd-

raulic pump bracket and move the pump
rearward if the spring cannot be adjusted
to the correct length. Tighten the bolts
and repeat Step 6.
289
9-11422
290
FEEDER JACKSHAFT DRIVE BELT

Belt Removal
Start the engine. Disengage the sepa- Loosen the adjusting nut on the belt
rator and feeder drive. Tum the engine tension spring assembly to reduce
OFF and remove the key. Remove the tension on the feeder jackshaft drive belt.
three (3) shields. Remove the feeder jacks haft drive belt.
Remove the feeder drive belt.
290
9-11422
1. Install the feeder jackshaft drive belt.
2. Adjust the belt tension. Turn the adjusting nut on the belt tension spring assembly
to adjust the spring length.
3. Compress the spring to the length of the spacer on the outside of the spring. The
spacer must be free to turn after adjustment.
4. Keep the spring length adjusted to the length of the spacer at all times.
5. Install and adjust the feeder drive belt.
291
9-11422
292
FEEDER DRIVE BELT

Belt Removal
Start the engine. Disengage the sepa- Remove the belttrap. Loosen the tension
rator and feeder drive. Turn the engine rod and remove the belt.
OFF and remove the key. Remove the
three (3) shields.
Loosen the mounting bolts for the upper

and lower guides. Move the guides away
from the drive pulley.
292
9-11422
293
147L8
1. Install the drive belt.
2. Adjust the belt tension rod until 3 inch (76 mm) of rod shows above the top nut.
3. Adjust the lower nut upward until the nut is tight against the inner spacer.
4. Adjust the upper and lower guides to give a clearance of 5/32 inch (4 mm)
between the belt and the guides.
5. Adjust the belt trap to give a clearance of 5/32 inch (4 mm) between the belt and
the belt trap.
6. Install all feeder drive shields except the small front shield.
293
9-11422
294
7. Start the engine. With separator dis-

engaged, put the feeder clutch switch
in the ON position.
8. Look through the front shield opening

and visually check the position of the
gauge block in relation to the gauge
window. The gauge block position
must be between the range shown in
diagrams A and B.
TOP OF BLOCK AT
CENTER OF GAUGE WINDOW
SPACER -~~"-;L-..,H---""'---
./ :
GAUGE BLOCK II
t
TOP OF BLOCK AT BOTTOM
II OF GAUGE WINDOW
SPRING---
LOWER NUT
A B 210L7
9. If necessary, adjust the belt tension as follows:

A. Stop the engine and remove the key.
B. Adjust the upper and lower nuts as required to get the guage block in the
correct window position.
C. Make sure the nuts are tight, then install the front shield.
10. Test the operation of the separator drive and feeder drive. If necessary, remove
front shield and repeat 7 through 10.
294
9-11422
295
CLEANING FAN DRIVE BELT

Belt Removal
Start the combine engine and place the Swing the control arm away from the
separator switch in the ON position. pulley. Remove the stop bolt and washer
Adjust the fan speed to the slowest from the end of the shaft.
speed. Disengage the separator drive
and turn the combine engine OFF.
Remove all shields for the fan drive belt.
Remove the outer pulley half, then the

drive belt.
Remove the upper and lower pivot bolts

from the speed control box.
295
9-11422
296
Belt Installation Belt Adjustments

STEPS STEP 6
FAN DRIVE
SHAFT
Install the drive belt in the reverse order of

I
Steps 1 through 4.
383L8
Belt tension is applied by springs on the

driven pulley. Tighten the spring mount-
ing bolts to compress the spring until the
spacer inside the spring is tight.
296
9-11422
297
STEP 7
\ THRUST
BEARING
CONTROL
ARMS
I~:=::=::r:mo t::::fl~
It
DRIVE
GEAR 0 \
";.ER NUTS
FAN SPEED
CONTROL
MOTOR
385L8
Adjust the inner nuts on the control block

rod for fan speed so that the belt never
runs above the outside diameter of either
pulley.
297
9-11422
298
CLEANING FAN JACKSHAFT BELT
Belt Removal
Remove the belt shields and remove the Remove the feeder drive belt from the
cleaning fan drive belt, see Page 295. jackshaft pulley, see Page 292.
298
9-11422
299
Belt Installation
Loosen the lock nuts on the belt tension

rod.
Install the fan jacks haft belt in the reverse
order of the preceding steps.
Adjustment
STEP 6
Remove the fan jackshaft belt.
145L.8
Tighten the lock nuts on the tension rod

until spring length is 9-1/2 inch (241 mm).
Lock nuts together.
299
9-11422
300
ELEVATOR DRIVE BELT
Belt Removal
Remove the shields covering the belt and Remove the fan drive belt.
pulleys. (If equipped).
300
9-11422
Remove the fan jackshaft drive belt. Remove the bearing support bracket
from the outer end of the elevator drive
jackshaft.
Remove the grain and tailing elevator

drive chains.
Loosen but do not remove the three nuts
that hold the bearing on the inner end of
the jackshaft.
Loosen the tension on the pulley tension

rod.
301
9-11422
302
Swing the outer end ofthe jacks haft away

from the grain elevator and slide the belt
over the end of the jacks haft. Remove the
belt from the rest of the pulleys.

STEP 9
388L.8
Install a new drive belt in the reverse Tighten the tension rod until the tension
order, Steps 1 through Step 8. spring measures 9-1/8 inch (232 mm) in
length.
302
9-11422
STRAW SPREADER DRIVE BELT
Belt Removal
Remove the shields covering the belt and Loosen the adjusting nuts on the tension
pulleys. rod. Remove the spreader drive belt from
the pulleys.
NOTE: If the combine is equipped with a
beater and/or straw chopper, remove the
elevator jackshaft and/or straw chopper
belts.
303
9-11422
304
Belt Installation
Remove the auger drive pulley. Install the spreader drive belt in the
reverse order, Step 1 through Step 5.
Belt Adjustment
Remove the belt guide.
Tighten the adjusting nuts on the tension

rod until the nuts are tight against the
tube spacer. Loosen the nuts just
enough to permit the spacer to turn. Lock
the nuts together.
Remove the spreader drive belt from the

drive pulley.
Install the belt drive shields.
304
9-11422
305
STRAW CHOPPER DRIVE BELT

Removal Installation
Remove the belt shield. Lift the channel Install the belt in the set of pulleys for the
lock off the spring. desired speed. See the decal on the drive
belt shield for instructions. Engage the
idler pulley by moving the idler pulley
lever up until the channel drops into place
over the spring.
Move the idler pulley handle down to

release the idler pulley. Remove the belt
from the pulleys.
The idler pulley must be engaged to

adjust the tension on the belt. Move the
channel lock up, away from the straw
chopper belt tension spring. Turn the
adjusting nut on the spring tension
assembly until the spring is compressed
to a length of 6-1/2 inch (165 mm). Lock
the adjusting nut.
NOTE: Due to belt stretch, the tension spring must be adjusted again to the 6-1/2
inch (165 mm) measurement when the spring length increases 3/8 inch (10 mm).
305
9-11422
306
MAINTENANCE/ADJUSTMENT _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
GRAIN TANK UNLOADER CHAIN

Removal
Remove the auger driven chain. See Remove the grain tank unloader drive
Rear Horizontal Auger Chain Removal. chain from the sprockets.
Loosen the tension idler for the unloader
chain. Move the idler up to give maximum
clearance to remove the chain.
Installation and Adjustment
Install the unloader drive chain on the The maximum chain deflection between
driven double sprocket, unloader the two sprockets is 1 inch (25.4 mm).
jacks haft sprocket and idler sprocket. Install the rear horizontal auger chain.
Move the idler sprocket against the chain See Rear Horizontal Chain Installation.
and tighten.
306
9-11422
307
REAR HORIZONTAL AUGER DRIVE CHAIN

Removal
Loosen the chain drive tension idler. Remove the drive chain from the sproc-
Move the idler down to give maximum kets.
clearance.
Installation and Adjustment
Install the drive chain on the sprockets. The maximum chain deflection between
Move the tension idler down against the the two sprockets is 1 inch (25.4 mm).
drive chain and tighten.
307
9-11422
308
ELEVATOR DRIVE SLIP CLUTCH ADJUSTMENT
The clutch is located on the drive for the DO NOT tighten the clutch unless it is ne-
grain and tailings elevators. The clutch cessary to do so. If it is necessary to dis-
will slip before any part on the combine is assemble the elevator drive slip clutch,
broken if any unusual strain is put on the compress the three springs to a 2-9/16
drive. Stop the combine immediately and inch (65 mm) length when assembling
remove the obstruction if the clutch is the clutch.
slipping.
TAILINGS ELEVATOR DRIVE CHAIN
Removal, Installation and Adjustment
Remove the tailings elevator drive chain by loosening the idler sprocket nut. Discon-
nect the master connecting link and remove the chain.
Install and adjust the chain to have 1 inch (25.4 mm) total free movement. Move the
idler sprocket up or down to adjust the chain free movement. Tighten the idler
sprocket nut.
NOTE: The tailings elevator drive chain must be adjusted for free movement
whenever the tailings elevator conveyor chain is adjusted.
308
9-11422
309
MAINTENANCE/ADJUSTMENT _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
TAILINGS ELEVATOR CONVEYOR CHAIN

Removal and Installation
To remove the tailings elevator conveyor
chain, turn the chain until the master con-
necting link is in a position at the lower
door. Disconnect the chain. Attach a new
conveyor chain to the old chain.
Pull old chain out and the new chain in

until the connector is at the bottom of the
elevator. Connect the ends of the new
chain together.
Adjustment
Loosen the nut on the idler sprocket and
move the idler sprocket up to loosen the
tailings elevator drive chain. Loosen the
nut on the conveyor bracket. Loosen the
bolt lock strap over the two adjusting
bolts at the top of the elevator head.
309
9-11422
310
Adjust the two bolts evenly until there is a

clearance of 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) between
the bottom of the elevator conveyor chain
lower sprocket and the chain. Position
and tighten the lock strap over the two
adjusting bolts at the top of the elevator
head. Tighten the nut on the conveyor
bracket. Adjust the tailings elevator drive
chain.
NOTE: Check the tension of the elevator

chain weekly. Do not tighten the chain too
much. It is important to maintain the
correct tension on the chain. Loose
elevator chains will grind the grain
between the chain and the sprocket.
LEAVE 1/32 INCH (0.8 mm)
CLEARANCE UNDER BOttOM
OF ELEVATOR CONVEYOR
CHAIN LOWER SPROCKET 229L7
CLEAN GRAIN ELEVATOR DRIVE CHAIN

Removal, Installation and Adjustment
Remove the clean grain elevator drive chain by loosening the nut on the tension
spring. Disconnect the master connecting link. Attach a new chain to the old chain.
Pull the old chain out and the new chain in. Connect the ends of the new chain.
Adjust the clean grain elevator drive chain by compressing the spring length to 6-5/8
inch (168 mm) between washers after running the combine.
310
9-11422
MAINTENANCE/ADJUSTMENT _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 311
CLEAN GRAIN ELEVATOR CONVEYOR CHAIN

Removal and Installation
To remove the grain elevator conveyor
chain. turn the chain until the master con-
necting link is in a position at the lower
door. Disconnect the chain. Attach a new
conveyor chain to the old chain.
Pull old chain out and the new chain in

until the connector is at the bottom of the
elevator. Connect the ends of the new
chain together.
Adjustment
Loosen the clean grain elevator drive chain by turning the nut on the spring loaded
tightener for the drive chain.
Loosen the bolt lock strap over the two adjusting bolts at the top of the elevator head.
311
9-11422
312
Adjust the two bolts evenly until there is a

clearance of 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) between
the bottom of the elevator conveyor chain
lower sprocket and the chain.
Position and tighten the lock strap over

the two adjusting bolts at the top of the
elevator head.
Adjust the clean grain elevator drive

chain.
NOTE: Check the tension of the elevator

chain week/yo Do not tighten the chain too
much. It is important to maintain the
correct tension on the chain. A loose
elevator chain will grind the grain
LEAVE 1/32 INCH (0.8 mm)
between the chain and the sprocket. CLEARANCE UNDER BOTtOM
OF ELEVATOR CONVEYOR
CHAIN LOWER SPROCKET 229L7
312
9-11422
313
FEEDER REVERSER DRIVE CHAIN

Removal
Push the idler arm to the down position to Remove the drive chain from the sproc-
reduce tension on the drive chain. kets.
Installation
Install the drive chain on the sprockets. Push the idler arm to the up position. The
tension spring will keep the correct
tension on the feeder reverser drive
chain.
313
9-11422
314
FEEDER CONVEYOR CHAIN
Removal
Loosen the adjusting bolt on each side of Remove the master link from the feeder
the feeder housing and move the drum conveyor chain. Use the old feeder
rearward. conveyor chain to pull the new feeder
conveyor chain through the feeder
housing.
Installation
Install the master link in the feeder

conveyor chain.
314
9-11422
315
Adjustments
Keep the feeder conveyor chain adjusted correctly at all times. Inspect the chain for
correct tension after the first 50 hours of operation and at regular intervals thereafter.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to adjust the chain evenly on both sides to prevent excessive
wear on both chains and sprockets.
The conveyor chain tension is adjusted by moving the feeder drum forward or
rearward. Adjust the chain tension as follows:
1. Loosen the drum arm pivot bolt on

each side of the feeder.
2. Use the adjusting bolt on each side of

the feeder to move the drum forward
to apply tension to the chain.
3. Adjust the conveyor chain to give

clearance of 1/32 to 1/8 inch (0.8 to
3.2 mm) between the chain slats and
the bottom of the feeder housing.
Measure the clearance at the point of
maximum sag of the lower strand of
the conveyor chain.
REAR
4. After adjusting the chain tension,

check the clearance between the
chain slats and the feeder adapter.
The clearance must be no more than
1-1/2 inch (38 mm) to provide correct
feeding and transfer of material from
the header auger. \
1/32 TO 1/8 INCH
(0.8 TO 3.2 mm)
211L7
5. If the clearance in Step 4 is not correct

add or remove chain links as neces-
sary and adjust the position of the
drum.
315
9-11422
316
BRAKE SYSTEM
Adjustments
NOTE: Before making any adjustments to the brakes, check the brake fluid reseNoir
to see if the fluid is up to the maximum fluid level mark; then bleed the lines of any air
that may have been trapped in the lines. See "Bleeding the Brake Unes".
The combine is equipped with hydraulically operated disc-type brakes. The brakes
are controlled by foot pedals which can be operated individually, or latched together.
To adjust the brakes, first adjust each master cylinder push rod, then adjust the pedal
travel. The master cylinders are located under the operators cab on the right hand
side.
316
9-11422
MAINTENANCE/ADJUSTMENT _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ 317
The master cylinder push rod must be adjusted to have clearance between the push
rod and the piston. To adjust, loosen lock nut A on the push rod and turn the push rod
until 5/64 to 13/64 inch (2.0 to 5.0 mm) free play is measured at rear edge of pedal
seal support. The free play can be felt by pulling down on brake pedal lever near the
seal. An increase in force is felt when push rod contacts piston. Tighten locknut A.
Repeat the adjustment for the other master cylinder push rod.
,
MASTER CYLINDER 2OOL7
t
To adjust the brake pedal travel, remove
the adjusting nut retainer and turn the
4T051NCH
,
(100 TO 125 mm)
brake adjusting nut until the pedal travel

is 4 to 5 inches (100 to 125 mm) when a
force of approximately 50 Ib (222 N) is
applied. Pedal travel is measured from
the middle of the pedal that is pressed
down to the middle of the other pedal.
Install the adjusting nut retainer.
PEDAL
SEAL IIX
SUPPORT L - - - - - - - f 199L7
After adjusting the brakes, operate the combine in third gear for about 1/4 mile (0.4
km). Check each brake housing to be sure the brake housings are not hot. If either
brake housing is hot, loosen the adjusting nut for that brake housing 1/6 turn and
repeat the check again after the brakes have cooled.
317
9-11422
318
PROPULSION CONTROL CABLE ADJUSTMENT

1. Start the engine. Put the throttle hand
lever in the low idle position. Slowly
move the propulsion control lever
forward and rearward to check the
transmission function. The combine
must not move when the propulsion
control lever is in the neutral position.
2. If the combine moves with the control

lever in the neutral position. move the
lever either forward or rearward.
slowly. until the combine does not
move. Stop the engine.
NOTE: The pump control lever will now

be in the neutral position. Do not move
the pump control lever when discon-
necting the control cable.
3. Disconnect the propulsion control

lever cable from the pump control
actuating arm by removing the clevis
pin.
4. Put the propulsion control lever in the

operators console in the neutral
position.
5. Loosen the control cable bulkhead

nuts.
6. Adjust the clevis on the end of the

control cable or the cable bulkhead
nuts until the hole in the cable clevis
aligns with the hole in the pump
control actuating arm.
318
9-11422
7. Install the clevis pin and cotter pin. Tighten the clevis lock nut and the cable
bulkhead nuts.
8. Start the engine and put the throttle hand lever in the low idle position.
9. Slowly move the propulsion control lever in the operators console forward and
rearward to check the transmission function. The combine must not move with the
propulsion control lever in the neutral position.
10. The pump control lever must not move unless the propulsion control lever in the
operators console is moved. If the pump control lever does move, increase the
spring tension against the pump control actuating arm by tightening the adjusting
nut on the tension spring.
NOTE: Do not overtighten the spring.
319
9-11422
320
GEAR SHIFT CABLE ADJUSTMENT
To check the gear shift cable adjustment,

move the gear shift lever to 1st gear and
check the clevis pin for the main shift
cable. When the cables have been
adjusted correctly, the clevis pin must be
free to turn in the clevis hole. Check the
clevis pin for each gear shift lever
position. If the clevis pin is tight, the
cables must be adjusted.
320
9-11422
SHIFT PIN
CONTROL CABLE
162L.B
Adjust the gear shift cables as follows:

1. Move the combine on level ground and engage the park brake. Put blocks in front
of and behind the drive wheels.
2. Move the gear shift lever to the neutral position.
3. Adjust the bulkhead nuts for the main shift cable so that the shift pin can slide into
either shift rail slot without moving the shift rails.
4. Next, adjust the bulkhead nuts on the shift pin control cable. The shift pin must fully
engage the slot in the upper shift rail when the shift lever is moved to the front of the
neutral slot on the console.
5. Check the main shift cable clevis pin for looseness with the gear shift lever in each
gear position. Be sure that the shift rails are in the detent position.
321
9-11422
322 MAINTENANCE/ADJUSTMENTS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
FOOT-N-INCH PEDAL ADJUSTMENT
'X.----- PEDAL FULLY RELEASED
- - - - - PEDAL FULLY DEPRESSED
CLEVIS PIN
$ ----
SEAL MOUNTING PAD
\ ~
----
-- /-
\_. Y--- FOOT-N-INCH VALVE
VALVE SPOOL 205L7
The foot-n-inch valve is located below the

operators cab in the center of the
combine. Adjust the foot-n-inch valve as
follows:
1. Loosen the valve mounting bolts.
Rotate the valve to a horizontal
position and tighten the mounting
bolts enough to hold the valve in
place.
2. Loosen the clevis lock nut.
3. Fully depress the foot-n-inch pedal. Tum the valve spool until the clevis pin is
centered between the slot walls when the valve spool is fully extended.
4. Tighten the clevis lock nut.
322
9-11422
5. Release the foot-n-inch pedal. Loosen the valve mounting bolts. Rotate the valve
until there is a 1/2 inch (13 mm) clearance between the top of the seal mounting
plate and the bottom of the deck.
6. Tighten the valve mounting bolts.
7. Check the adjustments in Steps 3 and 5 again. Repeat the procedure in Steps 1
through 6 until the adjustment is correct.
NOTE: Power to the drive wheels is disengaged when the foot-n-inch pedal is fully
depressed. The combine will be in a free wheeling state.
NEUTRAL START SWITCH ADJUSTMENT

The neutral start switch is used to prevent
moving the combine with the cranking
motor when starting the engine.
The switch moves to the closed position

when the foot-n-inch pedal is fully de-
pressed. This permits completion of the
starting circuit from the key switch to the
starting motor.
NOTE: Make sure that the neutral start

switch is not adjusted to the point where
the actuating lever can make contact with
the switch body.
Adjust the neutral start switch as follows:

1. Fully depress the foot-n-inch pedal.
2. Adjust the front and rear switch lock nuts until the switch plunger is fully pressed in
by the pedal actuating lever.
3. Turn the front switch lock nut one full turn counterclockwise to move the switch
rearward. Tighten the rear switch lock nut.
323
9-11422
324
FEEDER ADJUSTMENTS
Automatic Feeder Shutoff (If Equipped)
The automatic feeder shutoff monitors the speed of the feeder pivot shaft. Any time
the feeder pivot shaft speed is less than 30 RPM, power to the feeder clutch solenoid
will be shut off. The feeder indicator lamp on the shaft speed monitor will illuminate
and the audible warning will sound. The feeder will remain shut off until the feeder
clutch switch is turned OFF and ON.
NOTE: There is a five (5) second delay at start up, to allow the feeder to reach
operating speed, before the feeder shutoff starts to monitor the shaft speed.
324
9-11422
325
Bypass Automatic Feeder Shutoff

The automatic feeder shutoff can be bypassed to provide standard operation of the
feeder clutch. Power will be supplied to the feeder clutch any time the feeder clutch
switch is in the ON position.
To bypass the automatic feeder shutoff, remove the access panel on the RH side of
the operators cab and disconnect the gray wire and yellowwire. Connect the gray wire
to the gray wire with a red stripe.
Operational Check and Adjustment

If the feeder is not operating correctly, see the following operating malfunctions for
instructions.
A. Feeder does not engage at all. This indicates that there is no power to the feeder
clutch solenoid. Check the following items:
1. Check for blown fuse. Replace as required.
2. Make sure that the module is plugged in or that the bypass is correctly
connected.
B. Feeder runs for approximately five (5)

seconds and disengages. This
indicates that the module is not
getting a signal from the RPM sensor.
Check the following items:
1. Check for damage to the sensor or
connecting wires.
2. Check the clearance between the

sensor and the signal sprocket.
The correct clearance is 0.010 to
0.060 inch (0.254 to 1.524 mm).
If necessary, temporarily bypass the automatic feeder shutoff.
325
9-11422
326
Feeder Removal
Remove the feeder and header unit from the separator as follows:
1. Lower the header to a level surface. Block the header securely to remain in an
upright position when the combine is backed away from the feeder and header
unit.
2. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses to the header.
3. Remove the feeder drive belt. See Feeder Drive Belt Service in this manual on Page
292 for complete instructions.
4. Remove the reel pump drive shield
and the hydraulic valve and coupler
shield.
5. Remove the reel pump drive belt. See
Reel Pump Drive Belt Service on Page
288 in this manual for complete
instructions.
6. Remove the mounting bolts for the
hydrauliC pump support, hydraulic
valve and the hydraulic couplers. Tie
the complete unit to the operators
platform for support.
7. Remove the hydraulic pump support,

hydraulic valve, remote couplers and
the support brackets as a unit.
8. Remove the automatic header height

harness and automatic feeder cut off
harness (if equipped).
326
9-11422
9. Remove the rock trap drive chain or

reverser drive chain and shield, if
equipped.
10. Remove the mounting pins and cot-

ter pins for the lift cylinders. Discon-
nect the lift cylinders from the feeder.
11. Disconnect the lower feeder door

chains.
12. Remove the feeder pivot retainer pin

on each side of the feeder.
13. Slowly drive the combine rearward

away from the feeder and header
unit.
NOTE: When the combine is away from

the feeder unit, fasten the lift cylinders to
the operators platform.
To install the feeder and header unit, to

the separator reverse the above pro-
cedure.
327
9-11422
328
Feeder Cylinder Anchor Positions

The feeder lift cylinders must be mounted
in the correct position for the size feeder
being used. See the illustration for the
mounting positions for the 54-1/2 inch
and 47 inch feeders. The length of the
feeder housing used is determined by
the type of machine and the size of the
the tires used. 54-1/2 INCH
FEEDER 161 L8
UFT CYLINDER ANCHOR POSITIONS
Adjustable Strippers
Adjustable strippers reduce the build
up of material at the feeder conveyor
sprockets. Adjust the strippers as fol-
lows:
1. Remove the upper top cover from the
feeder.
2. Loosen the two stripper retainer bolts
for each stripper.
3. Move each stripper until the sprocket
is centered in this siot and the
sprocket teeth are a minimum of 1/32
inch (0.8 mm) from the strippers.
4. Tighten the retainer bolts and install
the feeder top cover.
Perforated Feeder Bottom (Parts Accessory)

The perforated feeder bottom sheet will
allow dirt to pass through the perfora-
tions instead of into the combine when
harvesting edible beans and peas.
W
\:
. ·rfl
, ! I °'
.'t:
I' i .
1
,,
~ ,
I·.: I
I,
!, I
.:,
;=
PERFORATED FEEDER
BOTTOM SHEET
212L7
328
9-11422
Feeder Reverser Chain (If Equipped)

The feeder reverser is available with and
without the rock trap. Service the feeder
reverser chain as follows:
1. Stop the engine and remove the key
from the switch.
2. Remove the feeder reverser shield.
3. Every 10 hours of operation inspect
the chain for wear and lubricate the
chain with clean engine oil or chain
lubricant.
4. To remove or install the chain, dis-
connect the tightener spring to reduce
tension on the chain.
329
9-11422
330
SEPARATOR DRIVE
Jackshaft Limit Switch Adjustment
Proceed as follows if the front and rear limit switches are replaced or need to be reset.
1. Start the engine. Move the separator drive switch to ON.
2. To set the front limit switch. close the --I I - 2-3/8 INCH
variable pulleys by pushing the rotor I I (60.3 mm)
switch to the fast speed rotor drive
position until there is a distance of
2-3/8 inch (60.3 mm) between the
jackshaft pulley halves at the outer
edges.
3. Move the separator drive switch to

OFF and stop the engine. Remove the
key from the key switch. 423L8
4. Loosen the front limit switch and rotate the switch toward the sprocket until the
switch clicks. Tighten the switch.
330
9-11422
S. To check the above setting, start the engine and move the separator drive switch to
ON. Open the variable pulleys by pushing the rotor switch to the slow speed rotor
drive position until there is a decrease of 100 RPM in the rotor speed. Close the
variable pulleys by pushing the rotor switch to the fast speed rotor drive position
until the motor shuts off. The distance between the jackshaft pulley halves at the
outer edges must be 2-3/8 inch (60.3 mm).
6. To set the rear limit switch, start the

engine and move the separator drive
3-5/8 INCH--j
switch to ON. Open the variable (92 mm) I
pulleys by pushing the rotor switch to
the slow speed rotor drive position
until there is a distance of 3-S/8 inch
(92 mm) between the jacks haft
pulleys at the outer edges.
7. Loosen the rear limit switch and ro-

tate the rear limit switch toward the
sprocket until the switch clicks. Tight- 424L8
en he switch.
8. To check the rear limit switch setting, start the engine and move the separator drive
switch to ON. Close the variable pulleys by pushing the rotor switch to the fast
speed rotor drive position until there is an increase of 100 RPM in the rotor speed.
9. Open the variable pulleys by pushing the rotor switch to the slow speed rotor drive
position until the motor shuts off. The distance between the Jackshaft pulleys at
the outer edges must be 3-S/8 inch (92 mm).
NOTE: The front and rear limit switches must be set correctly to prevent an overload
on the thrust bearing when the rotor is run at a fast speed or to prevent locking up the
threads when the rotor is run at a slow speed. Check the position of the limit switches
after rotor drive belt or limit switch replacement. Adjust as needed.
331
9-11422
ROTOR
Impeller Blade Stiffener/Wear Strip Replacement
Replace the impeller blade stiffener/wear
strips as follows:
1. Remove the rotor front access door.
2. Remove the five (5) mounting bolts for

the wear strip and remove the wear
strip from the impeller blade.
3. Install the new impeller wear strips.
NOTE: Always replace the wear strips as

complete sets.
4. Tighten the mounting bolts to the

following torque:
1/2 inch - hex head bolts - 80 to 90 Ib ft

(108 to 122 Nm)
1/2 inch - hex socket flat head capscrews

- 65 to 70 Ib ft (88 to 95 Nm)
332
9-11422
333
Impeller Blade Replacement

Remove the impeller blades as follows:
1. Remove the rotor front access door.
2. Make sure the impeller blade is in the

up position to remove the mounting
bolts.
3. Remove the five (5) mounting bolts,

impeller blade and wear strip.
4. Turn the rotor and remove each

remaining impeller blade in order.
Install the impeller blades as follows:
1. Put the impeller blade and wear strip on the rotor.
2. Install the five (5) mounting bolts for the impeller blade.
NOTE: Do not tighten the three (3) mounting bolts in the outer bar until the other im-
peller blades are installed.
3. Tighten the two (2) remaining mounting bolts (through the blade and wear strip) to
a torque of 80 to 90 Ib ft (108 to 122 Nm).
4. Turn the rotor and install the remaining impeller blades.
5. Tighten the three (3) mounting bolts in the outer bar on each impeller blade to a
torque of 80 to 90 Ib ft (108 to 122 Nm).
6. Install the rotor front access door.
333
9-11422
334
MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS
CONCAVE
Concave Adjustment
The concave is adjusted by a ratchet on the left hand side of the combine. The
indicator gauge is designed with a number of working positions for the concave.
Adjust the concave stop bolts and the gauge indicator position as follows:
1. Shift the rotor gear case to neutral.
2. Remove the concave access doors on the left hand side of combine.
3. Loosen the concave stop bolts.
4. Use a long rod or bar to tum the rotor. Install the rod or bar into the slots in the rotor
cage grate area. Use the adjusting rachet to move the concaves to the closed
position. Stop when the concaves just start to contact the rotor.
NOTE: The rotor must be tumed one complete revolution because of the high and low
spots on the rotor and concave.
334
9-11422
335
5. The concave must be leveled with the front adjustable eye bolt if the front and rear
concave do not contact the rotor at the same time.
6. After the concave makes contact with the rotor, the concave must be backed off
between 3/8 to 1/2 tum on the concave adjusting ratchet. There will be a clearance
of 1/16 to 5/64 inch (1.5 to 2.0 mm) between the concave and the rotor.
7. Tighten the concave stop bolts against the concave anchor support.
8. Install the concave access door.
9. Adjust the concave indicator gauge plate on the access door. The zero setting
mark on the plate must be opposite the top of the gauge indicator. The rotor must
not contact the concave in this position.
10. The concave can now be correctly adjusted to the desired position. See the
"Initial Crop Settings" in this manual.
335
9-11422
336
_ __
MAINTENANCE/ADJUSTMENTS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Concave Removal
Remove the cover panel from the right Uft the pipe off the concave sections.
side of the combine. Move the pipe to the left side of the sepa-
rator.
Open the access cover for the rear

eyebolt. Remove the cover panel from the left side
of the combine. Remove the four bolts
and nuts that hold the center concave ex-
tension. Lower the concave extension
and the concave.
Loosen the nuts on the four eyebolts just

enough to lift the pipe off of the concave.
336
9-11422
337
Remove the four bolts and nuts that hold Repeat Steps 5 through 8 to remove the
the concave extension to the concave. front and rear concave.
Installation
Remove the concave extension.
Install the desired concave sections and

concave extensions. The front concaves
and extensions have a ramp on the front
edge and must be replaced in the front
position.
NOTE: If necessary, turn the rotor to help

in the removal and installation of the
concave sections.
Pull the concave out from the left side of

the combine.
337
9-11422
338
GRATES
Grate Removal
Remove the cover panel on the left side Remove the three bolts and nuts that
of the combine. hold the center grate to the rotor cage.
Remove the four bolts and nuts that Remove the center grate. The center
connect the three grates. grate must be removed from the
combine first to allow clearance for
removing the other two grates. Repeat
Steps 3 and 4 to remove the front and
rear grate.
NOTE: The front grate is held to the rotor

cage by four bolts and nuts.
338
9-11422
339
Grate Installation
Install the grates on the left side of the Install and tighten the four bolts and nuts
combine. The rear grate must be in- that connect the grates.
stalled first. the front grate second and
the middle grate last. The slotted end of
each grate hooks into the spacer on the
grate hanger bar which is located on the
right side of the combine.
Install the cover panel on the left side of

the combine.
Install and tighten the bolts and nuts that

hold the grate to the rotor cage.
339
9-11422
340
AUGER BED
Drive Gear Adjustment
Adjust the drive gears for the augers as

follows:
1. Loosen the drive gear yoke on the
auger drive shaft.
2. Move the drive gear into mesh with the

driven gear.
3. Turn the drive gear back and forth and

adjust the clearance between the
gears. Set the backlash at 1/32 to
15/64 inch (0.8 to 6.1 mm) when
measured at the outside diameter of
the grain bed auger flight. This mea-
surement must be within specifications when the bevel drive gear end play is 1/32
inch (0.8 mm).
4. Tighten the drive gear yoke on the auger drive shaft.
5. Adjust the backlash on the remaining drive gears as specified above.
340
9-11422
341
STRAW SPREADER
Drive Gear Compartment Cleaning
Remove covers over straw spreader

drive gears at 100 hour intervals by
removing two thumbscrews from each
cover.
Clean straw from the area around the

gears.
341
9-11422
342 MAINTENANCE/ADJUSTMENTS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
STRAW CHOPPER
Concave Blade Replacement
_________ L~--- ___ ~ __ - - - -

::..._~ -=--~ _ .....c. _..=... _ _ _ _-=:-
- ----
159L8
The concave blade assembly is removed

from the concave by pulling on the two
adjusting pins and then lifting the
assembly out. New blades are riveted on
the assembly with 3/16 x 5/8 inch flat
head solid rivets.
Use the concave adjusting bolts to set a

clearance of 1/16 to 3/16 inch (1.6 to 4.8
mm) between the concave and the tip of
the rotor blade.
342
9-11422
Rotor Blade Replacement
Stop the engine and remove the key from the key switch to prevent anyone from
starting the combine.
The straw chopper rotor blades can be
reversed for increased wear. Place each
blade on the original blade support when
reversing the rotor blades. Position the
nut against the support and tighten the
bolts from the blade side to a torque of 75
to 85 Ib ft (102 to 115 Nm).
Replace straw chopper rotor blades in
sets of two. When replacing a straw
chopper rotor blade, make sure that the
straw chopper rotor blade opposite the
one that is being replaced, is replaced
also, to maintain a balanced straw
chopper rotor.
Use 1/2 x 1 inch hex head, grade 5 bolts and flange lock nuts. Position the nuts
against the support and tighten the bolts from the blade side to a torque of 75 to 85 Ib
ft (102 to 115 Nm). The rotor must be balanced if too much vibration occurs after reas-
sembly. See your Dealer.
NOTE: Do not remove the bolts on the balancing disk at the ends of the straw
chopper rotor.
343
9-11422
CLEANING FAN
Fan Adjustment
The cleaning fan must be correctly located in the fan housing in order for the fan to
deliver the correct amount of air to the shoe. Adjust the fan assembly as follows:
1. Loosen the mounting bolts for the fan

support brackets. The brackets are
bolted to the main frame on each side
of the combine.
2. Move the fan assembly forward or

rearward to adjust the clearance
between the fan blade and the fan
housing. The correct clearance is 1/8
to 1/4 inch (3t06 mm) at the air cut-off
point.
3. After adjusting the clearance, make

sure the fan blades are square in the
housing.
4. When the fan is correctly adjusted,

securely tighten the mounting bolts on
each side of the combine.
AIR
~ _ _ _ CUT-OFF
POINT
_ - - - - 1/8 TO 1/4 INCH
(3.0 TO 6.0 mm)
226L7
344
9-11422
COOLING SYSTEM
Cleaning the Rotary Screen, Radiator, Transmission
Oil Cooler and Condenser Core
Inspect the cooling systems daily. The rotary screen is self-cleaning and gives
protection to radiator, oil cooler and condenser, but the cooling fins can still be coated
with dust and dirt. Clean with compressed air or water, or a brush.
Open the latches on the upper right hand

side panel and hold the panel in place
with the support rod. When a buildup of
dust and dirt is found, remove the clean
out plug from the bottom of the
compartment. Clean the radiator and
compartment. Install the clean out plug
and close the side panel. Close the
latches.
345
9-11422
346
346
9-11422
347
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION INDEX
Alternator Charging System ...... 349-350
Batteries ....................................351-353
Auxiliary Battery
Connections ...........................352-353
Batteries Not in Use ..................... 352
Cables and Terminals .................. 352
Electrical Specifications ............348-349

Deluxe Seat Fuse ......................... 349
Fuses ............................................ 348
Fuse Panel .................................... 349
Lamps and Bulbs ......................... 348
Head Lamp Adjustment.. ..........354-355
Lamp Replacement .. .................356-359

Grain Scan Monitor ............... 357-358
Instrument Cluster ........................ 356
Shaft Speed Monitor .................... 359
347
9-11422
348
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
System Voltage .................................................................... 12 volt negative ground
Batteries ...................................................................... Two 12 volt low maintenance
525 CCA Hybrid Batteries,
Group Size 28
Alternator ....................................................................................... Motorola, 90 Amp
Cranking Motor ................................................... Oelco Remy, Positive engagement
Lamps and Bulbs

Sealed Beam Lamps Bulb Numbers
Headlamps ................................................................................................... 74043
Flood Lamps ............................................................................................... 72806
Lamps
Tail Lamps ...................................................................................................... 1157
Warning Lamps .............................................................................................. 1156
Instrument Lamps ............................................................................................... 57
Monitor Lamps ................................................................................................... 73
Turn Signal and Unloader Indicator ................................................................. 192
Dome Lamp .................................................................................................... 1142
Grain Tank Lamp ............................................................................................ 4414
Un loader Lamp ............................................................................................... 4406
Fuses
1. Electronic Monitors .............................................................. 10 Amp ATC-10 Red
2. Electronic Auto Controls ......................................................10 Amp ATC-10 Red
3. Flashing Warning Lamps .................................................... 15 Amp ATC-15 Blue
4. Dome Lamp ........................................................................... 3 Amp ATC-3 Violet
5. Windshield Wiper. ................................................................. 10 Amp ATC-10 Red
6. Radio ..................................................................................... 3 Amp ATC-3 Violet
7. Shaft Speed Monitor Alarm Memory ....................................... 5 Amp ATC-5 Tan
8. Electronic Main ................................................................. 30 Amp ATC-30 Green
9. Ether Start Solenoid ............................................................ 15 Amp ATC-15 Blue
10. Audible Alert and Gauge Cluster ........................................... 5 Amp ATC-5 Tan
11. Header Lift ......................................................................... 10 Amp ATC-10 Red
12. Cigar Lighter and 4 Wheel Drive ....................................... 10 Amp ATC-10 Red
A Before working on any part of the electrical system. disconnect the

battery ground cable. Do not connect cable until alJ electrical work
has been completed. This will prevent shorts or electrical shocks.
M198
348
9-11422
349
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Fuse Panel
The fuse panel is mounted under a cover
plate at the rear of the right console. The
fuses give protection for the electrical
circuits of the combine and cab. To
replace a fuse, pull the fuse out of the
clips and push a new fuse in between the
clips.
IMPORTANT: Make sure the new fuse

has the same ampere rating as the fuse
being replaced.
Deluxe Seat Fuse (If Equipped)

A 10 ampere in (ATC-10 Red) line fuse
gives protection for the deluxe seat. To
replace the fuse, remove the RH cab side
panel. Pull the fuse out of the fuse holder
clips and push a new fuse in between the
clips. Install the RH cab side panel.
ALTERNATOR CHARGING SYSTEM

Follow these general rules to prevent damage to the electrical system:
1. Before working on the electrical system, disconnect the battery cables.
2. Do not make a reverse battery connection.
3. When you use an auxiliary battery for starting, connect negative to negative
(combine chassis) and positive to positive.
4. When charging the combine batteries, disconnect the battery cables from the
battery terminals. Do not use a battery charging machine for starting the
combine.
5. Never operate the combine when the battery cables are disconnected.
6. When you do maintenance on the engine, prevent foreign material from entering
the alternator.
7. If you must do welding, disconnect the batteries. Put the ground cable as close
as you can to the weld area. Do not put the ground cable where the current can
flow through bearings or along channels with wire harnesses.
349
9-11422
350
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Alternator
The alternator is hinge-mounted on the
side of the engine.
The internal thermal cut-out switch is

designed to sense the internal tempera-
ture of the alternator. Upon reaching an
undesirable temperature, the switch dee-
nergizes the alternator. The ampere indi-
cator lamp and/or voltmeter on the instru-
ment cluster indicates the shutdown of
the alternator.
When the ampere indicator lamp comes

on or voltmeter reading drops, the operator should stop the engine and clean the al-
ternator screen and alternator. A suggested means is with an air hose.
In order to assure satisfactory operation of the charging system, make a periodic

check as follows:
(1) Keep proper belt tension.
(2) Mounting bolts must be tight.
(3) Keep the alternator screen clean.
To prevent possible damage to the system avoid the following:
1. Do not short-out or ground across the terminals of the alternator.
2. Do not operate the charging system with the output cable disconnected or with the
battery disconnected.
350
9-11422
351
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
BATIERIES
The combine is equipped with two 12 volt low maintenance batteries. Check the
electrolyte level in each cell after every 100 hours or 3 months. Add distilled water to
get the electrolyte level up to the indicator under each cap. Keep the vent holes open
at all times.
When replacing the battery, make sure that the ground cable is connected to the
negative (-) terminal on the battery.
NOTE: To prevent damage to the battery, do not over tighten the battery hold down
bolts.
BATTERY ACID CAUSES SEVERE BURNS. Batteries contain sulfuric

acid. Avoid contact with skin. eyes or clothing. Antidote: EXTERNAL
- flush with water. INTERNAL - Drink large quantities of water or milk.
Follow with milk of magnesia. beaten egg or vegetable oil. Call phy-
sician immediately.
A EYES - Flush with water for 15 minutes and get prompt medical at-
tention.
BATTERIES PRODUCE EXPLOSIVE CASES. Keep sparks, flame and
cigarettes away. Ventilate when charging or using in enclosed
space. Always shield eyes when working near batteries. KEEP OUT
OF REACH OF CHILDREN. M144
351
9-11422
352
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Battery Cables and Terminals

The battery terminals must be kept clean and tight. A good method to clean the
terminals is to use Battery Saver, Case IH Part Number M20376 according to
instructions on the container. This cleaner needs no water. If Case IH Battery Saver is
not available, remove all corrosion with a wire brush, then wash with a weak solution of
baking soda or ammonia. Put some petroleum jelly or light grease on the terminals to
prevent more corrosion.
Inspect the battery cables for damage. Replace any battery cable that has damage.
To prevent hard starting, keep battery cables tight.
A When working around storage batteries. remember that all of the

exposed metal parts are "live". Never lay a metal object across the
terminals because a spark or short circuit may result. M145
When Batteries Are Not In Use

When the combine is not in use, the batteries will need a charge every six weeks. A
storage battery not in use will slowly discharge. A battery that has discharged can
freeze at low ambient temperatures and cause damage to the battery and combine.
Auxiliary Battery Connections

Engine can start with transmission in gear when neutral or safety
start switch is by-passed:
1. Do not connect across terminals on starter.
2. Attach a booster battery by connecting the positive terminal of the
booster battery to the "positive terminar provided or to the po-
sitive terminal of the machine battery. Connect the negative ter-
minal of the booster battery to the "negative terminar provided or
to the chassis of the machine.
Then use recommended starting procedures from operators seat.
3. When necessary. repair electrical system components promptly
so that "jump starting" will not be attempted.
Machine run-away can cause injury or death to operator and bystan-
ders. M107C
If the battery is discharged and the lights do not indicate some battery voltage, check
the battery for an open circuit with a voltmeter. Disconnect the negative (-) battery
cable from the battery. Connect the voltmeter between the negative (-) and the
positive ( +) battery terminals. If the voltmeter shows no voltage, the battery has an
intemal open circuit. Replace the battery. Connecting a battery charger or an auxiliary
battery to a battery with an open circuit can cause a spark inside the battery. The
spark can cause a battery explosion.
If the voltmeter shows a voltage, a battery charger or an auxiliary battery can be
connected to the discharged battery. 352
9-11422
353
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
When using a battery charger, make sure that the charger is turned off before
connecting to the battery. Charge the battery in a well ventilated area only. Do not try
to charge a frozen battery.
Battery explosion and/or damage to electrical components can

result from improper connection of booster batteries or charger.
Connect positive to positive and negative to negative. Externally,
battery acid can cause burns and blindness. and taken internally is
poison. M146
NOTE: The combine uses an electrical system with a negative ground. Making
connections to the electrical system in reversed polarity can cause damage to the
electrical system components.
Connect an auxiliary battery to the

combine battery in the exact order as
follows:
1. Connect the positive ( + ) cable clamp

of the auxiliary battery to the batteries
boost stud on the combine batteries.
NOTE: The cable clamps must not

make contact with any metal objects.
2. Connect one of the negative cable clamps to the negative (-) terminal on the
auxiliary battery.
3. Connect the other negative cable clamp to the combine chassis, away from the
batteries.
IMPORTANT: This is the only safe method to start the engine with an extemal power
supply. Any other method of starting can cause injury or death to the operator or other
persons. Do not connect auxiliary battery cables across the terminals of the starter.
Start the engine from the operators seat.
After the engine is started, disconnect the auxiliary battery cables in the exact order as
follows:
1. Disconnect the negative cable clamp from the combine chassis.
2. Disconnect the other negative cable clamp from the negative terminal of the
auxiliary battery.
3. Disconnect the positive cable clamp from the battery boost stud on the combine
batteries and then from the positive terminal on the auxiliary battery.
353
9-11422
354
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
HEAD LAMP ADJUSTMENT
The head lamps can be adjusted up or down and to the right or left to illuminate the
area in front of the combine. The recommendation for head lamp adjustment is as
follows:
HEAD LAMP 1 - Center of beam just beyond the LH end of the header.
HEAD LAMP 2 - Center of beam 100 feet (30.5 m) in front of the cab and on the
combine centerline.
HEAD LAMP 3 - Center of beam 50 feet (15.25 m) in front of the cab and to the left of
the combine centerline.
HEAD LAMP 4 - Center of beam 50 feet (15.25 m) in front of the cab and to the right
of the combine centerline.
HEAD LAMP 5 - Center of beam 300 feet (91.4 m) in front of the cab and on the
combine centerline.
HEAD LAMP 6 - Center of beam just beyond the RH end of the header.
354
9-11422
355
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
, , , '\
,/ \ I '
/ " \
, \I 'i '\
\-1-0 -
/
APPROX.
SOFT. -0
\I
i
LI
I
\'
I
Ii
I
APPROX.
100FT. --0--
\,
1 ""1'"
I
\
\
APPROX.
300 FT. --0--
203L7
355
9-11422
356
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
LAMP REPLACEMENT
Instrument Cluster
1. Remove the four screws that hold the
instrument cluster to the right hand
panel. Remove the instrument cluster
from the panel.
2. Remove the bulb and socket as-

sembly by rotating the socket coun-
terclockwise. Remove the bulb from
the socket. Replace the lamps. See
Specifications for the correct bulb.
356
9-11422
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 357
Grain Scan Monitor

1. Disconnect the monitor harness.
2. Remove the monitor console from the

bracket.
3. Remove the three screws that hold the

console covers together.
357
9-11422
358
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4. Put the console assembly on a bench.

The side of the console with the
harn~ss must be toward the bench.
Remove the top cover.
5. Replace the lamps. Seethe Specifica-

tions for the correct bulb.
NOTE: When assembling the console, make sure that the front panel and circuit
board are in the slots. The console covers must fit together without any force.
358
9-11422
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 359
Shaft Speed Monitor

When replacing the indicator lamps make sure that the key switch is in the OFF posi-
tion. Remove the four screws that hold the console in the headliner. Remove the con-
sole and disconnect the harness from the rear of the console.
NOTE: When installing the console, be careful not to tighten the screws too much.
1. Remove the five screws on the top

cover to replace a bulb in the top row.
Remove the five screws on the bottom
cover to replace a bulb in the bottom
row. Remove the cover.
2. Remove the bulb and socket as-

sembly by rotating the socket coun-
terclockwise. Remove the bulb from
the socket. Replace the lamps. See
Specifications for the correct bulb.
359
9-11422
360
360
9-11422
STORAGE ________________________________________
361
SECTION INDEX
Storage Preparation ..................362-363
Removing from Storage ................... 364
361
9-11422
362 STORAGE ________________________________________
STORAGE PREPARATION
When your combine is not going to be used for some time. store the combine in a dry
protected place. Leaving your combine outside. open to the weather. will shorten its
life.
Follow the procedure below when your combine is placed in storage for periods up to
six months.
See your Dealer for the procedure on longer periods of storage.
1. Wash or clean and completely lubricate the combine. See the Lubrication Section
in this manual.
2. Clean the inside of the combine including the chaffer sieves. shoe sieves,
operators cab and instrument console.
3. Rodents can damage a combine in storage. Rodents will eat plastic. insulation or
rubber material, especially when coated with grain dust. Clean the areas where
rodents may nest. Leave access panels and doors open to remove convenient
nesting pockets. In some conditions. leaving moth balls will help discourage rats
and mice.
4. Run the engine long enough to completely warm the oil in the crankcase before
draining the oil. Remove and replace the oil filter as instructed. Fill the crankcase
with fresh oil and run the engine for two to five minutes.
5. Open the drain on the water separator fuel filter and drain the water and sediment
before closing. Fill the fuel tank with a premium grade diesel fuel. If this fuel grade
has not been used regularly. drain the fuel tank and fill with premium diesel fuel.
Run the engine for five minutes to circulate the fuel through the fuel injection
system.
6. Clean the air cleaner filter and body.
7. Drain, flush and fill the cooling system with the correct antifreeze mixture to protect
the combine to the lowest anticipated temperature. Add cooling system
conditioner and change the coolant filter conditioner.
8. Close the fuel shutoff valve between the water separator filter and fuel tank to
prevent fuel draining from fuel injection system into the fuel tank.
9. Plug the engine breather pipe and exhaust pipe.
362
9-11422
STORAGE ________________________________________
363
10. The batteries do not need to be removed from the combine, except for extended
storage (more than 30 days) below freezing temperatures. The batteries must be
fully charged to prevent freezing. Disconnect the negative (-) ground cable at the
batteries to prevent possible discharge.
11. Store the combine where there is protection from light. Clean the tires before
storage. Support the combine so that the load is off the tires. If the combine is not
supported, inflate the tires at regular intervals.
12. Lubricate all the chains with oil.
13. Open the doors at the bottom of elevators and grain tank. Open the front auger
bed door and clean out the auger bed.
14. Retract all hydraulic cylinders to prevent the piston rods from rusting. Always
lower the header to remove the weight from the hydraulic system. Coat all
exposed cylinder rods with light grease to prevent rust.
15. Remove tension from the belts.
LEFT SIDE OF COMBINE LEFT SIDE OF COMBINE
363
9-11422
364 STORAGE
REMOVING FROM STORAGE

It is recommended that caution be used when starting an engine that has been in
storage.
1. Open the fuel tank shutoff valve. Open the separator filter drain valve and remove
contaminated fuel. Close the drain valve.
2. Check that the grade of oil in the engine crankcase is as specified in this Manual.
3. Remove the plugs from the engine breather tube and the exhaust pipe.
4. Check the coolant level in the radiator.
5. Check that the batteries are fully charged. Connect the ground cables and tighten
all terminals.
6. Check the brake fluid level and linkages.
A Check the machine for leaks or any parts that are broken. not
working correctly. or not there at all. Before you start the machine.
tIghten all caps. dipstIcks. battery covers. etc. Ml04
h Before starting the engine. be sure all operating controls are in

. . neutral or park lock position. This will eliminate accidental
movement of the machine or start up of power driven equipment.
Ml06D
h Never operate the engine in a closed building. Proper ventilation is

. . required under all cIrcumstances. M142
7. Do not accelerate the engine rapidly, or operate at high RPM immediately after
starting.
8. Check the tension on the drive belts.
9. Inflate the tires to the correct operating pressures.
10. Close the elevator doors and the grain tank unloader door.
11. Make sure that all shields are in proper position.
NOTE: The Case Company reserves the right to make improvements in design or
changes in specifications at any time without incurring any obligation to install them
on units previously sold.
364
9-11422
365
MACHINE SETTING FOR VARIOUS CROPS

CROP
Date
I I I
MACHINE SErnNG
Rotor
Speed
Rotor
Gear Ratio
Range
Concave
Indicator
Concave
Type
Chaffer
Setting
Shoe
Setting
Fan
Speed
Grate
Type
Transport
Vane
Position
Crop Moisture _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Yield _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Rem~ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
365
9-11422
366
MACHINE SETIING FOR VARIOUS CROPS

CROP
Date
MACHINE SE1TING
Rotor
Speed
Rotor
Gear Ratio
Range
Concave
Indicator
Concave
Type
Chaffer
Setting
Shoe
Setting
Fan
Speed
Grate
Type
Transport
Vane
Position
Crop Moisture _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Yield _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Rem~ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
366
9-11422
367
CROP
Date
I 1 J 1
MACHINE SETIING
Rotor
Speed
Rotor
Gear Ratio
Range
Concave
Indicator
Concave
Type
Chaffer
Setting
Shoe
Setting
Fan
Speed
Grate
Type
Transport
Vane
Position
CropMo~~ ________________________________________________
Yield _____________________________________________________
Rem~ ___________________________________________________
367
9-11422
368

CROP
Date
I
MACHINE SETTING
Rotor
Speed
Rotor
Gear Ratio
Range
Concave
Indicator
Concave
Type
Chaffer
Setting
Shoe
Setting
Fan
Speed
Grate
Type
Transport
Vane
Position
CropM~~~ ________________________________________________
Y"l8ld _______________________________________
Rema~ ___________________________________
368
9-11422

IH 1660 Prior

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IH 1660 Prior

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Thank you for purchasing this manual from Farm Manuals Fast.

Tips for getting the most out of this manual

Keep this manual in a safe place!

These Tips might be outdated. Check www.FarmManualsFast.com/ Tips-and-Tricks

TO THE OWNER OF A CASE IH COMBINE

Call your dealer if you need any assistance or information.

PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION AND

MODELJPIN NUMBERS ENGINE

Model Number _ _ _ _ _ _ __ Serial Number _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Operating Instructions ........................................................................................... .

Field Operation ..................................................................................................... 1

Maintenance/Adjustments .................................................................................... 261

Electrical System .................................................................................................. 34

Storage ................................................................................................................. 361

Feeder Safety Lock .............................. 8

Safety Rules ...................................... 6.7

Check and service cooling system according to maintenance instructions.

Feeder Safety Lock

TO ENGAGE THE FEEDER SAFElY LOCK:

TO DISENGAGE THE FEEDER SAFElY LOCK:

Do not enter grain tank when

before shifting ::~)

Planetary Gear Power Guide Wheels Only

t. PI.ce .11 I. .,. ia a.lllni or off ,osition IIlfo..

IMPORTANT: Rocker Arm-to-Valve Clearance adjustments must be made when the

Engine Lubrication System

Air Intake System

Hydrostatic Propulsion System

Auxiliary Hydraulic System

Grain Delivery Auger

Grain Tank Leveling Auger - Corn and Grain Combine

Tailings Auger Trough

Tailings Delivery Auger

Straw Chopper - If Equipped

APPROXIMATE TRAVEL SPEEDS

TIRE mph mph mph mph mph mph

18.4-38 R2 4.25 7.74 20.33 5.14 9.36 20.33

23.1-26 R3 3.44 6.27 16.48 4.17 7.59 16.48

28L-26 R1 3.73 6.80 17.87 4.52 8.23 17.87

28L-26 R2 3.76 6.85 17.99 4.55 8.29 17.99

28L-26 R3 3.65 6.66 17.49 4.42 8.05 17.49

24.5-32 R1 4.20 7.64 20.08 5.08 9.24 20.08

24.5-32 R2 4.21 7.67 20.14 5.09 9.27 20.14

24.5-32 R3 3.97 7.23 19.00 4.80 8.75 19.00

30.5L-32 R1 4.24 7.71 20.26 5.12 9.33 20.26

30.5L-32 R2 4.34 7.91 20.77 5.25 9.56 20.77

30.5L-32 R3 4.02 7.33 19.25 4.87 8.87 19.25

67 x 34-30 R2 4.06 7.40 19.44 4.92 8.95 19.44

23.1-26 R1 2.97 5.42 14.23 3.60 6.55 17.22

23.1-26 R3 2.76 5.03 13.22 3.34 6.09 15.99

28L-26 R1 3.00 5.46 14.33 3.62 6.60 17.34

28L-26 R2 3.02 5.49 14.43 3.65 6.65 17.46

28L-26 R3 2.93 5.34 14.03 3.55 6.46 16.97

24.5-32 R1 3.37 6.13 16.10 4.07 7.42 19.49

24.5-32 R2 3.38 6.15 16.15 4.08 7.44 19.55

24.5-32 R3 3.19 5.80 15.24 3.85 7.02 18.44

18.4-38 R2 3.41 6.21 16.31 4.12 7.51 19.73

18.4-38 R1 3.40 6.19 16.26 4.11 7.49 19.67

30.5L-32 R2 3.48 6.34 16.66 4.21 7.67 20.16

30.SL-32 R3 3.23 5.88 1S.45 3.91 7.11 18.69

67 x 34-30 R2 3.26 S.94 1S.60 3.94 7.18 18.87

NOTE: The same speeds apply for forward and reverse.

24.5-32 R2 3.38 6.15 16.15 4.08 7.44 19.55

30.5L-32 R2 3.48 6.34 16.66 4.21 7.67 20.16